DuraStar NAVITRANS

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 408

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Preface Crossmembers ........................................................................................ 01-50


Crossmembers With Tapered Rails......................................................... 01-51
Government Requirements
Frame Drilling Guidelines ........................................................................ 01-52
Your Obligations Under The Law ................................................... Govt Req-1
Frame Drilling Restrictions....................................................................... 01-53
Penalties For Violations.................................................................. Govt Req-1
Maximum Wheelbase Frame Stretching.................................................. 01-55
Federal Motor Vehicle Standards (FMVSS) and
Frame Height Calculation – at Centerline of Front Axle .......................... 01-56
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS) ............. Govt Req-3
Frame Height Data – Front...................................................................... 01-57
Additional Lighting Information ....................................................... Govt Req-5
Frame Height Calculation – at Centerline of Rear Axle ........................... 01-58
Additional Requirements: EPA ..................................................... Govt Req-10
Bump Heights – Rear .............................................................................. 01-59
Replacement or Service Parts...................................................... Govt Req-10
Frame and Bump Height Data – Rear ..................................................... 01-60
Certification of Incomplete Vehicles Manufactured by
Frame Height Calculation – at Front and Rear Rail Ends........................ 01-63
Navistar, Inc. ......................................................................... Govt Req-12
Front Bumper and Tow Hooks................................................................. 01-64
Exterior Noise Certification Label ................................................. Govt Req-18
Front Bumper, Tow Hooks and Extensions ............................................. 01-66
Chassis Diagrams (EGR): 00 Tire Carrier............................................................................................... 01-68
4300 4x2 Models ....................................................................................... 00-1 Overhang Limits for Refuse/Recycler Bodies ......................................... 01-69
4400 4x2 Models ....................................................................................... 00-7
Front Axles: 02
4300 LP 4x2 Models................................................................................ 00-13
All Models .................................................................................................. 02-1
4400 6x4 Models ..................................................................................... 00-25
Front Axle Tread ........................................................................................ 02-2
Front and Rear View................................................................................ 00-31
Front Suspensions: 03
Chassis Diagrams (SCR): 00
Front Suspension Brackets........................................................................ 03-1
4300 4x2 Models ....................................................................................... 00-1
4300 LP 4x2 Models.................................................................................. 00-7 Brakes: 04
4400 4x2 Models ..................................................................................... 00-13 All Models .................................................................................................. 04-1
4400 LP 4x2 Models................................................................................ 00-19 Full Power Hydraulic Brake System Schematic......................................... 04-4
4400 6x4 Models ..................................................................................... 00-25 Antilock Air Brake System Schematic........................................................ 04-5
Front and Rear View................................................................................ 00-31 Routing Guidelines .................................................................................... 04-6
Hood Tilt .................................................................................................. 00-32 Air-Operated Auxiliary Attachments........................................................... 04-7
Tube Fitting Installation Instructions .......................................................... 04-8
Frames: 01
Removal and Insertion Procedures for Tubing in QC or PTC Fittings ....... 04-9
General Frame Information ....................................................................... 01-1
Air Brake Tubing ...................................................................................... 04-10
Frame Rail Cross-Sections...................................................................... 01-34
Inside Cab & Foot Valve Plumbing .......................................................... 04-12
Intermediate Crossmember Location ...................................................... 01-36
Hydraulic Control Unit Plumbing.............................................................. 04-13
AF Crossmember Locations .................................................................... 01-48

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TABLE OF CONTENTS JANUARY 2016 — 1-1


DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TABLE OF CONTENTS JANUARY 2016 — 1-2

Parking Brake Assembly With Hydraulic Brakes .....................................04-14 Engine Port Location (SCR).......................................................................12-3
Air ABS ECU (Electrical Control Unit)......................................................04-15 Water Cooler Mounting ..............................................................................12-7
Air Tank Location (EGR)..........................................................................04-16 Transmission: 13
Air Tank Location (SCR) ..........................................................................04-21 Transmission PTO Data.............................................................................13-1
Air Dryer Location ....................................................................................04-31
Rear Axles & Suspensions: 14
Steering: 05 Rear Axle Tread .........................................................................................14-1
Steering Gear Location/Dimensions ..........................................................05-1 Rear Axle Tread Data ................................................................................14-2
Exhaust System (EGR): 07 Rear Suspension........................................................................................14-4
Guidelines for Aftertreatment Modifications ...............................................07-1 Fuel Tanks: 15
Aftertreatment Diagrams..........................................................................07-12 Fuel Tank Location (EGR) .........................................................................15-1
Exhaust System (SCR): 07 Under Cab Step Location With Crew Cab (EGR) ....................................15-15
Guidelines for Aftertreatment Modifications .............................................07-29 Fuel Tank and Step Location (SCR) ........................................................15-20
Turbo Pipe ...............................................................................................07-30 DEF Tank Location (SCR) .......................................................................15-38
Aftertreatment Module .............................................................................07-30 DEF System and Aftertreatment Information for SCR .............................15-41
Temperature Control Device....................................................................07-31 Cab: 16
Exhaust Piping Modifications ...................................................................07-31 Air Conditioning System Modifications.......................................................16-1
Mounting of Body Equipment...................................................................07-32 Cab Dimensions.........................................................................................16-2
Backpressure Data Sheets ......................................................................07-34 Door Swing Clearance ...............................................................................16-4
Backpressure Test Procedure .................................................................07-35 Instrument Panel ........................................................................................16-6
Horizontal Aftertreatment .........................................................................07-37
Vertical Aftertreatment .............................................................................07-45
General Exhaust Information ...................................................................07-46
Electrical: 08
Battery Box Location (EGR).......................................................................08-1
Battery Box Location (SCR).......................................................................08-8
Battery Box Location (SCR).......................................................................08-9
SCR Electrical Circuit Diagrams ..............................................................08-12
Cooling Obstruction Guidelines ...............................................................08-13
Fifth Wheel: 10
Fifth Wheel Height Calculations.................................................................10-1
Fifth Wheel Mounting Information ..............................................................10-2
Engine: 12
Engine Location .........................................................................................12-1
PREFACE
FOREWORD Engineering Contacts:
The CT-471 – Body Builder Books are a set of publications of which this Body Application Engineers
Builder is a part. The complete set contains information related to the features
Curt Studebaker DuraStar
and specifications for each truck in the International® product line. (Manager)
331-332-2718 curt.studebaker@navistar.com
TerraStar
Disclaimer Melissa Gauger WorkStar
331-332-3010 melissa.gauger@navistar.com
(Manager) PayStar
The Body Builder Books provide product information to assist those who wish to
Jon Agostini 331-332-3774 john.agostini@navistar.com
modify these products for individual applications. Navistar, Inc. does not DuraStar
recommend or approve any firm or party nor make any judgements on the Scott Laman 331-332-3997 scott.laman@navistar.com
TerraStar
quality of the work performed by a particular firm or party. Individuals who use Bruce Purvis 331-332-1976 bruce.purvis@navistar.com
the services of a Body Builder must satisfy themselves as to the quality of the Steve Hartman 331-332-3695 steven.hartman@navistar.com
work. Mark Netzly 331-332-6415 mark.netzly@navistar.com WorkStar
The party installing a body, a fifth wheel, any other equipment, or making any abhilash.pamulaparthy@ PayStar
Abhi Pamulaparthy 331-332-3463 HX
modifications to complete the vehicle for delivery and make it road-ready is navistar.com
responsible to see that the completed vehicle complies with all applicable Jon Wild 331-332-3462 jon.wild@navistar.com
certification procedures and safety standards, as may be set forth in federal, Vocational Engineers
state, and local statues, rules and regulations.Specifications, descriptions and Paul Nieuwlandt 260-450-4639 paul.nieuwlandt@navistar.com Vocational
illustrative material in this literature are as accurate as known at time of Brent Bott 331-332-4290 brent.bott@navistar.com Vocational
publication but are subject to change without notice. Navistar, Inc. cannot
Truck Body Integration
accept responsibility for typographical errors which may have occurred.
Illustrations are not always to scale and may include optional equipment and Brian Hicks brian.hicks@navistar.com
accessories but may not include all standard equipment. Jay Bissontz jay.bissontz@navistar.com
Luis Leon luis.leon@navistar.com Diamond Logic®
Any changes to the fuel delivery and return system may negatively affect the
performance of the engine. Should changes be made the installer should verify Lonny Lipp lonny.lipp@navistar.com
that those changes still meet the requirements of the engine for proper system Chris Ripco chris.ripco@navistar.com
performance. Navistar, Inc. cannot accept responsibility for engine performance
issues, error messages, or any other issues caused by changes to the fuel
delivery and return system. Please contact Navistar, Inc. for information on the
engine requirements for the fuel delivery and return system if needed.
International® and the International® logotype are registered trademarks of
Navistar, Inc.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER PREFACE FEBRUARY 2015 — PREFACE-1


DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER PREFACE FEBRUARY 2015 — PREFACE-2

PUBLICATION ORDERING INFORMATION


You can easily order the CT-471 set or any of its components by accessing the
Marketing Resource Center and clicking the “Order Brochures” link, using your
regular User ID and password.
Revisions to the following product publications are available automatically by
subscribing to the Product Information Revision Service. Also, additional copies
of product publications can be ordered individually on a one-time basis. When
ordering, include the publication number, description and quantity required.
Body Builder Books – Complete Set ........................................... CT-471
UC Commercial Bus: Cutaway Bus Chassis Body
Builder Book ............................................................................ PBB-39100
DuraStar® Series: Medium Conventional Body
Builder Book ............................................................................ PBB-43100
TerraStar® Series: Medium Conventional Body
Builder Book ............................................................................ PBB-44100
PayStar® Series: Premium On/Off Highway
Conventional Body Builder Book ............................................. PBB-45100
HX® Series: Premium On/Off Highway
Conventional Body Builder Book ............................................. PBB-47100
WorkStar® Series: Medium & Heavy
Conventional Body Builder Book ............................................. PBB-50100
Diamond Logic® Control Systems ....................................... PBB-71000
GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS
YOUR OBLIGATIONS UNDER THE LAW
The important information in this section will acquaint you with U.S. and Canadian safety and emission standards that apply to Navistar, Inc.
(Navistar) vehicles sold in the two countries, of those laws that established these standards, and the identity of the parties responsible for
certification of compliance for both COMPLETE VEHICLES and INCOMPLETE VEHICLES. To the best of Navistar's knowledge, it is correct as of the date of
this printing. Navistar, however cannot accept responsibility for its completeness and currency. User must ascertain this on their own. This section is
written specifically for trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) greater than 10,000 lbs. (4,536 kg).
The National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966, in the U.S., gave rise to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). In
addition, The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), through the Environmental Policy Act of 1969, set forth environmental protection standards.
In Canada, the Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1970 established the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS) Act and Environment Canada
establishes environmental protection standards.
These standards place the responsibility for compliance of a COMPLETE VEHICLE on the vehicle and engine manufacturers. Any vehicle purchased
from Navistar, as a COMPLETE VEHICLE, as defined by section 568.3 of Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) is certified by Navistar to
comply with all applicable safety standards provided modifications or additions to the vehicle do not result in non-compliance with applicable U.S.
and Canadian standards to which Navistar has certified compliance. The Engine Manufacturer is responsible to certify the engine to the U.S. EPA
and Environment Canada’s standards.
It is the responsibility of every International dealer to assure that the service work or modifications that can affect compliance, performed on a new
vehicle prior to delivery to the customer, meets the requirements specified by all mandated standards. It is the responsibility of the Final-Stage
Manufacturer who typically installs a body, a fifth wheel, or any other equipment, or makes any modifications to an INCOMPLETE VEHICLE supplied by
Navistar, to certify compliance with the applicable standards for the vehicle when completed. Further, it is the responsibility of the Final-Stage
Manufacturer to determine, and fully comply with, any additional requirements of the several States and Provinces. In addition, the Final-Stage
Manufacturer must certify compliance with any other standards set forth in U.S. and Canadian regulations, statutes and ordinances.

PENALTIES FOR VIOLATIONS


Violation of the provisions contained within the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards is subject to fines of up to $5,000 per vehicle or up to a
maximum of $15,000,000. The following violations are subject to these penalties:
1. Any manufacturer who knowingly or unknowingly produces for sale a motor vehicle subject to the law, but which does not meet all the
applicable provisions of the law.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-1
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-2

2. Any party who sells or offers for sale a motor vehicle built after the effective date of a standard, which in the knowledge of the selling
party does not comply with the standard.
3. Any party (manufacturer, dealer, body builder or other) who completes a vehicle for sale in compliance with the law but fails to certify the
completed vehicle in the prescribed manner.
4. Any party who knowingly certifies a vehicle as complying, which does not in fact meet the requirements of the law.
Situations where the government was intentionally misled in regards to safety related defects are criminal violations and are punishable by a
maximum of 15 years in prison.
The U.S. Department of Transportation has declared its intent to institute procedures periodically to inspect vehicles subject to the law, and to
implement enforcement procedures that will permit detection of violations.
The requirements of the law are stringent and the penalties for violation are severe. It is therefore mandatory that all personnel involved in any of the
following aspects of motor vehicles become familiar with the provisions of the law as they relate to their responsibilities.
• Installation of equipment sub-assemblies and/or bodies (Intermediate and Final Stage Manufacturer)
• Sales
• Preparation for delivery
• Modification or conversion (Alterer)
• Maintenance and repair
Violation of the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards law carries similar penalties.
NOTE: The Canadian, Mexican, and U.S. vehicle standards, which regulate the manufacture of vehicles for sale in their respective
countries, may at any time exceed all or a portion of the mandated requirements of one or both of the other two countries. This
situation exists due to established standards or regulatory revisions in one country, which have not yet been incorporated by
the other(s).

Each of these countries require that any vehicle crossing its border(s) in commerce must comply with all applicable standards
of their country and comply with the standards that were in effect as of the date of manufacture of that vehicle.
FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE STANDARDS (FMVSS) AND CANADIAN MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS (CMVSS)
The following standards of Title 49 of the CFR apply to Trucks having a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds (4,536 kg.). Presently, all International®
trucks fall in this classification.
For any vehicle manufactured by and purchased from Navistar and defined by section 567.3 of Title 49 of the CFR as an Incomplete Vehicle,
consult the Incomplete Vehicle Document (IVD) provided with each Incomplete Vehicle to determine those particular safety standards with which the
vehicle complies. Any standards, with which Navistar cannot certify compliance because of the level of completion of that vehicle, become the
responsibility of the Intermediate Manufacturer or Final-Stage Manufacture or both.
Table 1.1

SAFETY STANDARD IDENTIFICATION


(Applicable to all completed vehicles greater than 10,000 LBS.)
FMVSS 101, CMVSS 101 Controls, Telltales, and Indicators
FMVSS 102, CMVSS 102 Transmission Shift Position Sequence, Starter Interlock and Transmission Braking Effect
FMVSS 103, CMVSS 103 Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems
FMVSS 104, CMVSS 104 Windshield Wiping and Washing Systems
FMVSS 105, CMVSS 105 Hydraulic and Electric Brake Systems
FMVSS 106, CMVSS 106 Brake Hoses
FMVSS 108, CMVSS 108 Lamps, Reflective Devices and Associated Equipment
FMVSS 111, CMVSS 111 Rearview Mirrors
FMVSS 113, CMVSS 113 Hood Latch System
U.S. 49 CFR part 565, CMVSS 115 Vehicle Identification Number Requirements
FMVSS 116, CMVSS 116 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluids
FMVSS 119, CMVSS 119 New Pneumatic Tires for Vehicles other than passenger cars
FMVSS 120, CMVSS 120 Tire selection and Rims for vehicles with a GVWR of more than 4,536 Kilograms (10,000 pounds)
FMVSS 121, CMVSS 121 Air Brake Systems
FMVSS 124, CMVSS 124 Acceleration Control Systems
FMVSS 125 Warning Devices
* N/A – Not Applicable

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-3
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-4

SAFETY STANDARD IDENTIFICATION


(Applicable to all completed vehicles greater than 10,000 LBS.)
FMVSS 205, CMVSS 205 Glazing Materials
FMVSS 206, CMVSS 206 Door Locks and Door Retention Components
FMVSS 207, CMVSS 207 Seating Systems
FMVSS 208, CMVSS 208 Occupant Crash Protection
FMVSS 209, CMVSS 209 Seat Belt Assemblies
FMVSS 210, CMVSS 210 Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages
FMVSS 213, CMVSS 213 Child Restraint Systems
FMVSS 302, CMVSS 302 Flammability of Interior Materials
FMVSS 403 Platform Lift Systems for Motor Vehicles
FMVSS 404 Platform Lift Installations in Motor Vehicles
CMVSS 301.1 LPG Fuel System Integrity
CMVSS 301.2 CNG Fuel System Integrity
FMVSS 304 CNG Fuel Container
CMVSS 1106 Noise Emissions
* N/A – Not Applicable
ADDITIONAL LIGHTING INFORMATION
Lighting Devices and Reflectors Required by FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108

Table 1.2
Required Vehicle Lighting Equipment for Trucks with an Overall Width of 80 Inches or More

HEIGHT ABOVE ROAD SURFACE


REQUIRED LIGHTING
QTY COLOR LOCATION POSITION (In inches measured from the center of the
EQUIPMENT
lamp on vehicle at curb height.)
On the front, symmetrical, as far apart as
Headlamps Forward road
2 minimum White practicable (if 4 lamp system, outboard or above Not less than 22 or more than 54.
(Lower Beam) illumination
upper beams)
Headlamps Forward road On the front, symmetrical (if 4 lamp system,
2 minimum White Not less than 22 or more than 54.
(Upper Beam) illumination inboard or below lower beams)
Daytime Running Lamps -
White or Indicate in-use 380 (15) minimum. Maximum depends on
Attention: for Canada 2 minimum Front, symmetrical, as far apart as practicable
Yellow vehicle tyupe of DRL.
required, for US optional
One on each side of the vertical centerline at the
Turn signal (Front) 2 Amber At or near front Not less than 15 or more than 83.
same height and as far apart as practicable.
All three on same level as close as practicable
As close as practicable to the vertical centerline
to the top of the vehicle with lamp centers
Identification Lamp (Front) 3 Amber Front of the vehicle or the vertical centerline of the cab
spaced not less than 6 inches or more than 12
where different from the centerline of the vehicle.
inches apart.
One lamp each side of the vertical centerline at
Tail Lamp 2 Red Rear Both on the same level between 15 and 72.
the same height and as far apart as practicable.
One lamp each side of the vertical centerline at
Stop Lamp 2 Red Rear Both on the same level between 15 and 72.
the same height and as far apart as practicable.
One on each One on each side of the vertical centerline to
Front Clearance Lamps 2 Amber Both on the same level as high as practicable.
side of front indicate width.
One on each One on each side of the vertical centerline to
Rear Clearance Lamps 2 Red Both on the same level as high as practicable.
side of rear indicate overall width.
Side Marker Lamp, One on At or near midpoint between front and rear side
2 Amber Not less than 15.
Intermediate each side marker lamps, if vehicle over 30' in length.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-5
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-6

HEIGHT ABOVE ROAD SURFACE


REQUIRED LIGHTING
QTY COLOR LOCATION POSITION (In inches measured from the center of the
EQUIPMENT
lamp on vehicle at curb height.)
Reflex Reflector One on At or near midpoint between front and rear side
2 Amber Between 15 and 60.
Intermediate (Side) each side reflectors if over 30' in length.
One on each side of vertical centerline, as far
Reflex Reflector (Rear) 2 Red Rear Both on the same level, between 15 and 60.
apart as practicable.
Reflex Reflector (Rear One on each
2 Red As far to the rear as practicable. Between 15 and 60.
Side) side (rear)
Reflex Reflector (Front One on each
2 Amber As far to the front as practicable. Between 15 and 60.
Side) side (front)
At rear To illuminate the license plate from the top or
License Plate Lamp Rear 1 White No requirements.
license plate sides.
One on
Side Marker Lamp (Front) 2 Amber As far to the front as practicable. Not less than 15.
each side
One on
Side Marker Lamp (Rear) 2 Red As far to the rear as practicable. Not less than 15.
each side
Amber One lamp on each side of the vertical centerline
Turn Signal (Rear) 2 Rear Both on the same level, between 15 and 83.
or Red as far apart as practicable.
All three on the same level as close as
One as close as practicable to vertical centerline. practicable to the top of the vehicles with lamp
Identification Lamp (Rear) 3 Red Rear
One on each side. centers spaced not less than 6" or more than
12" apart.
2 Amber Front
Vehicular Hazard Warning One lamp on each side of vertical centerline as
Amber Both on the same level, between 15 and 83.
Flashing Lamps 2 Rear far apart as practicable.
or Red
Backup Lamp 1 White Rear Rear No requirement.
exactly 2 pairs
Rear Upper
of 300mm long White Rear Rear upper corners of cab, facing rearward As high as practicable excluding fairings
Body Marking (Tractor)
strips
Exactly 2
Rear, facing rearward, on fenders, on mud flap
sections, Red/ As horizontal as practicable and not higher
Rear Marking (Tractor) Rear brackets, or within 300mm below the top of mud
minimum White than 1,525 mm from the ground
flaps
600mm each
(Figures 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 for Illustration Purposes Only)

(At highest point)

LEGEND
1. Headlamps (2) – White (4 optional)
2. Side marker lamps. Front (2) – Amber
3. Side reflectors. Front (2) – Amber
4. Turn signal lamps. Front (2) – Amber
4a. Turn signal lamps. Front (2) – Amber (Optional
location)
5. Identification lamps. Front (3) – Amber
5a. Identification lamps. Front (3) – Amber
(Optional location)
6. Clearance lamps. Front (2) – Amber
7. Side marker lamps. Rear (2) – Red
(May be combined) 8. Side reflectors. Rear (2) – Red
9. Identification lamps. Rear (3) – Red
9 10
10
10. Clearance lamps. Rear (2) – Red
11. Reflectors Rear (2) – Red
12. Stop lamps. Rear (2) – Red
13. License plate lamp. Rear (1) – White
14. Backup lamp. Rear (1) – White (location
optional provided optional requirements are
met)
15. Side marker lamps. Intermediate (2) – Amber
(if vehicle is 30' or more overall length)
16. Side reflectors. Intermediate (2) – Amber (if
17 14 13 17 vehicle is 30' or more overall length)
17. Turn signal lamps. Rear (2) – Amber or Red
11 11 18. Tail lamps. Rear (2) – Red
18 12 12 18 0_0004

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-7
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-8

(Figures 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 for Illustration Purposes Only)

6
5
LEGEND
1. Headlamps (2) - White (4 optional)
2. iSide marker lamps. Front (2) - Amber
3. Side reflectors. Front (2) - Amber
4. Turn signal lamps. Front (2) - Amber
5. Identification lamps. Front (3) - Amber
6. Clearance lamps. Front (2) - Amber

6
5
2, 3, 4

Figure 1.2 1 2, 3, 4
(Figures 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 for Illustration Purposes Only)

Rear of Cab

14

11 11
Rear of Vehicle Rear of Vehicle
LEGEND
11. Reflectors. Rear (2) – Red
12. Stop lamps. Rear (2) – Red
13. License plate lamp. Rear (1) – White
14. Backup lamp. Rear (1) – White (location
18 17 12 13 optional provided optional requirements
are met)
(may be combined)
0_0007 17. Turn signal lamps. Rear (2) – Amber or
Red
18. Tail lamps. Rear (2) – Red

Figure 1.3

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-9
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-10

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS: EPA


EPA Part 205 Subpart B, CMVSS 1106 – Noise Emission For Medium And Heavy Trucks
INCOMPLETE VEHICLES identified as a CHASSIS CAB by Navistar, and all COMPLETE VEHICLES will comply with the requirements specified
by EPA PART 205 SUBPART B and CMVSS 1106 provided that no changes are made to the noise generating and/or suppression
equipment installed by Navistar.
EPA Part 86, CMVSS 1100 – Emission Control
Engines provided with International vehicles will comply with all applicable exhaust emission standards. Modifications to the vehicle and/or
engine, which will cause noncompliance, are prohibited by the regulations. For further information see the vehicle operator’s manual and the
engine manual.
EPA Part 86, CFR 1037 – Vehicle Emission Controls
Vehicles manufactured by Navistar have been built to comply with all applicable vehicle emissions standards. Modifications to the vehicle
which will cause noncompliance are prohibited by regulations. Refer to the Vehicle Emissions Control Information label on the vehicle for a list
of Emissions reduction components. For further information, please review the vehicle operator’s manual.

REPLACEMENT OR SERVICE PARTS


The Motor Vehicle Safety Standards primarily specify the requirements and/or performance standards that a Complete Vehicle must comply with.
However, certain specific components of the vehicle, when sold by a dealer or distributor as replacement or service parts, are required to comply
with the requirements and/or performance standards specified by the standards. Certification of compliance must also be provided for these
components and those items that are subject to these procedures are as follows:
• Windshield and window glass – FMVSS/CMVSS 205
• Seat belts – FMVSS/CMVSS 209
• Hydraulic brake hose – FMVSS/CMVSS 106
• Hydraulic brake fluids – FMVSS/CMVSS 116
• Lamps and reflective devices – FMVSS/CMVSS 108
• Warning devices – FMVSS 125 (Reflective Triangle)
• Tires and Wheels – FMVSS/CMVSS 119/120
• Platform Lift System – FMVSS 403
The standards require that all of the above items manufactured for sale, whether for use in the manufacture of a vehicle or for sale as parts, must
comply with applicable provisions of the safety standards. Such items when sold by dealers or distributors must be labeled to certify compliance.
Such labeling may be placed on the part itself or on the container in which the part is shipped.
The items listed above that are manufactured by or for Navistar, Inc. as service parts will comply with all applicable standards as required.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-11
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-12

CERTIFICATION OF INCOMPLETE VEHICLES MANUFACTURED BY NAVISTAR, INC.


In accordance with the laws of the United States and Canada all vehicles manufactured for sale and sold for use in these countries must comply
with the applicable federal safety standards and certification of compliance must be provided with the vehicle.
Section 567.3 of Title 49 of the CFR defines an INCOMPLETE VEHICLE as an assemblage consisting, at a minimum, of chassis (including the frame)
structure, power train, steering system, suspension system, and braking system, in the state that those systems are to be part of the completed
vehicle, but requires further manufacturing operations, to become a completed vehicle. For an INCOMPLETE VEHICLE manufactured by Navistar to be
classified as a COMPLETE VEHICLE, subsequent manufactures must mount a body or other load carrying equipment on the chassis prior to delivery to
the end user so that it can perform its intended function.

Incomplete Vehicle Manufacturer


DEFINITION
Section 567.3 of Title 49 of the CFR defines an Incomplete Vehicle Manufacturer as a person who manufactures an incomplete vehicle by assembling
components none of which, taken separately, constitute an incomplete vehicle.
Compliance Responsibility
As manufactured by Navistar, an Incomplete Vehicle is built with all appropriate safety items that comply with the applicable regulatory requirements to the
extent that the vehicle's state of completion will permit. To obtain a Complete Vehicle status under section 567.3 of Title 49 of the CFR, an Intermediate or
Final-Stage Manufacturer must mount a body or other similar load carrying equipment on the chassis prior to delivery to the end user.
Navistar identifies an INCOMPLETE VEHICLE with one of the following designations depending on the vehicle's state of completion:
• Chassis Cab
• Flat Back Cowl (FBC) Chassis Bus or School Bus
• Partial Cab Bus or School Bus
• Partial Cab Truck
• Stripped Chassis
In accordance with section 568.4 of Title 49 of the CFR, Navistar furnishes an INCOMPLETE VEHICLE Document (IVD) with each INCOMPLETE VEHICLE. This
document provides the following information:
• Name and mailing address of the INCOMPLETE VEHICLE manufacturer
• Date of manufacture
• Vehicle Identification Number
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) for each axle of the intended COMPLETE VEHICLE
• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of the intended COMPLETE VEHICLE
• Vehicle Type into which the INCOMPLETE VEHICLE may appropriately be manufactured
• Suitable tire and rim choice with inflation pressure
• List of all Federal U.S. or Canadian safety standards applicable to the type of vehicle.
(Those standards to which the vehicle complies as produced by Navistar, Inc. will be identified.)
For all Incomplete Vehicles except those without a cab, the IVD is placed in the left hand door dispatch compartment. For Incomplete Vehicles
without a cab, the IVD is placed in a clear plastic envelope and strap locked to the radiator stay rod.
In accordance with section 567.5 of Title 49 of the CFR, Navistar will also affix an Incomplete Vehicle Information Label to the hinge pillar, door
latch post, or door edge that meets the door latch post, next to the driver's seating position (Figure 1.5).

Manufactured in the U.S. or Mexico

Figure 1.5 Incomplete Vehicle Information Label

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-13
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-14

CANADA
All International Incomplete Vehicles manufactured and sold in Canada will also have a Canada National Safety Mark and National Emissions Mark affixed to
the vehicle (Figure 1.6).

Figure 1.6 Canada 0_0010


National Safety Mark and
National Emissions Mark
Label

Intermediate Manufacturer
DEFINITION
Section 567.3 of Title 49 of the CFR defines an INTERMEDIATE MANUFACTURER as a person, other than the Incomplete Vehicle Manufacturer or Final
Stage Manufacturer, who performs manufacturing operations on a vehicle manufactured in two or more stages.

COMPLIANCE RESPONSIBILITY
In accordance with section 568.4 of Title 49 of the CFR, Navistar furnishes an Incomplete Vehicle Document (IVD) with each incomplete vehicle. Navistar will
also affix an information label to the hinge pillar, door latch post, or door edge that meets the door latch post, next to the drivers seating position as specified
in part 567.5 of Title 49 of the CFR.
In accordance with section 568.5 of Title 49 of the CFR each intermediate manufacturer is required to provide an addendum to the IVD for any modification
made by them to the incomplete vehicle that affects the validity of the compliance statements that appear in the IVD. The addendum must provide the name
and mailing address of the intermediate manufacturer and specify the changes that must be made to the IVD to reflect the modifications that they made to
the vehicle.

Final Stage Manufacturer


DEFINITION
As defined by section 567.3 of Title 49 of the CFR, a FINAL – STAGE MANUFACTURER is a person who performs such manufacturing operations on an
incomplete vehicle that it becomes a complete vehicle.

COMPLIANCE RESPONSIBILITY
Section 568.6 of Title 49 of the CFR requires that the final – stage manufacturer shall complete the vehicle in such manner that it meets all applicable safety
standards in effect on the date of manufacture of the incomplete vehicle, the date of final completion, or a date between these dates. It should be noted that
a vehicle intended for use as a tractor, is not considered a complete vehicle until the fifth wheel has been installed. When completed, the tractor must comply
with all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Section 567.5 of Title 49 of the CFR stipulates that the Final Stage Manufacturer is responsible
for installing an appropriate certification label that must be securely and permanently affixed to the completed vehicle.
For those situations when an entity other than a Navistar facility certifies a completed vehicle, that entity becomes the Final – Stage Manufacturer and has
the option to create its own label or purchase a label from International service parts. Labels purchased from service parts do not have the name of the Final
- Stage Manufacturer and information about the vehicle. This information has been left blank. Final – Stage Manufacturers that utilize the appropriate label
and protective cover (435654C2) and provide the required information comply with the requirements specified by part 567 of Title 49 of the CFR. The label
(Figure1.7) is referred to as a “Final Stage Manufacturer Certification Label” and is identified with Navistar part number 3591119C3 for a vehicle sold in the
U.S. or 3591120C3 for a vehicle sold in Canada.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-15
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-16

3591110C3 – U.S.

O_0011

3591120C3 – Canada

O_0012

Figure 1.7 Final Stage Manufacturer Certification

CANADA
Certified Final – Stage Manufacturers of Canadian vehicles may be required to affix the Canada National Safety Mark and National Emissions Mark with their
identification number installed on it next to the final certification label shown above. Such authorization and identification number must be obtained from the
Minister of Transport at Transport Canada. (Figure 1.6 – “Canada National Safety Mark and National Emissions Mark.)

ALTERATIONS TO COMPLETED VEHICLES


DEFINITION
Section 567.3 of Title 49 of the CFR defines an Altered Vehicle as a completed vehicle previously certified in accordance with section 567.4 or 567.5 that has
been altered other than by the addition, substitution, or removal of readily attachable components or by minor finishing operations, before the first purchase
of the vehicle other than for resale, in such a manner as may affect the conformity of the vehicle with one or more FMVSS or the validity of the vehicle's
stated weight ratings or vehicle type classification.
COMPLIANCE RESPONSIBILITY
In accordance with section 567.7 of Title 49 of the CFR, if a person alters a certified vehicle before the first purchase of the vehicle other than for resale, the
responsibility for compliance of the modified vehicle rests with the Alterer. The vehicle manufacturer's Certification Label and any Information Labels shall
remain affixed to the vehicle and the alterer shall affix an additional certification label that will supplement the certification label originally furnished with the
vehicle by Navistar or the Final – Stage Manufacturer. This certification label must state the following:
“This vehicle was altered by (name of Alterer) in (month and year in which alterations were completed) and as altered it conforms to all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Bumper and Theft Prevention Standards affected by the alteration and in effect on the date of
(no earlier than the date of manufacture of the certified vehicle as specified on the certification label and no later than the date
alterations were completed).”
This label (Figure 1.8) is available from International service parts under Part No. 449893C5 for U.S. Certified Vehicles and Part No.1676840C3 for Canada
Certified Vehicles. Protective cover 435654C2 should be installed over this label.

449893C5
for U.S. Certified Vehicles

O_0013

1676840C3
for Canada Certified Vehicles

O_0014

Figure 1.8 Vehicle Alterer Certification Label

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-17
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FEBRUARY 2015 — GOVT REQ-18

Alterers of Canadian certified vehicles must apply the Canada National Safety Mark and National Emissions Mark, with their identification number, adjacent
to the Vehicle Alterer Certification label. Such authorization and identification number must be obtained from the Minister of Transport at Transport Canada.
(Figure 1.6 – Canada National Safety Mark and National Emissions Mark.)

EXTERIOR NOISE CERTIFICATION LABEL


Incomplete vehicles identified as chassis cabs by Navistar have the vehicle exterior noise label (Figure 1.9) permanently attached in a readily visible
position in the operators compartment. For incomplete vehicles other than a chassis cab, the final stage manufacturer must assume responsibility
and comply with EPA PART 205 SUBPART B, CMVSS 1106 – NOISE EMISSION FOR MEDIUM AND HEAVY TRUCKS.

For Vehicles Built in the U.S.

Figure 1.9 Vehicle Exterior Noise Label

ADDITIONAL CERTIFICATION LABEL INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS


1. All labels must be fully filled out.
2. All labels must be affixed to the vehicle in accordance with Sections 567 of Title 49 of the CFR or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Regulations, Sections 6 and 7.
3. No label shall be installed over another label.
4. It is unlawful to affix an incorrect certification label to a vehicle.
CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR)
4300 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Standard Cab

FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM Maintain a 3" minimum clearance
fore and aft of tire; in area over
the truck axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside of frame rail


AIR DRYER

AIR TANKS

REAR
FRONT
AXLE
AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4000_plan_4x2_standard

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-1
- CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-2
- CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Standard Cab

CF
107 (2718) BBC CA AF

FRONT
AXLE
62.8
(1594)
REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

67.1 GROUND LINE


(1705)
BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL
4000_side_4x2_standard

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded - 33.69”, loaded - 31.73”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded - 35.56”, loaded - 32.02”
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4300 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM Maintain a 3" minimum clearance
fore and aft of tire; in area over
the truck axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside of frame rail

FRONT REAR
AXLE AIR TANKS AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4000_plan_4x2_extended

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-3
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-4
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

CF

133.0 BBC CA AF
(3378)

FRONT
AXLE

62.8
(1594) REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE
93.10
(2364)
BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL 4000_side_4x2_extended

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 35.56", loaded – 32.02"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4300 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
Maintain a 3" minimum clearance
fore and aft of tire; in area over
the truck axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside of frame rail

FRONT REAR
AIR TANKS
AXLE AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4000_plan_4x2_crew

This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-5
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-6
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

BBC CF
151.0
(3836) CA AF

FRONT
AXLE
63.4
(1610.4)
REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE

111.10
(2821)

BA
39.9 WB
(1013) 4000_side_4x2_crew
OAL

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 35.56", loaded – 32.02"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4400 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Standard Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

Maintain a 3" mininum


clearance fore and aft of
tire; in area over the truck
axle (between the rails),
AFTERTREATMENT body crossmembers cannot
SYSTEM extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3

(850.9) (1150.6)

* To Inside
AIR DRYER of Frame Rail

AIR TANKS

FRONT REAR
AXLE AXLE
BATTERY BOX
4400_plan_4x2_standard_dual_mega.

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-7
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-8
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Standard Cab

107 BBC CF
(2718)
CA AF

FRONT
AXLE
66.7
(1694)

REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE
67.0
(1702)
BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL

4400_side_4x2_standard_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded - 33.69”, loaded - 31.73”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded - 37.00”, loaded - 33.26”
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

NOTE:
4400 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
Maintain a 3" mininum
clearance fore and aft of
tire;in area over the truck
axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

*
33.5 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To Inside
of Frame Rail

REAR
FRONT AIR TANKS AXLE
AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4400_plan_4x2_extended_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-9
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-10
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

CF

133.0 BBC CA AF
(3378)

FRONT
AXLE

66.7
(1694)
REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE

93.0
(2362)

39.9 WB
(1013)

4400_side_4x2_extended_dual_mega
OAL

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 37.00", loaded – 33.26"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4400 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
Maintain a 3" mininum
clearance fore and aft of
tire;in area over the truck
axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.

* To Inside
of Frame Rail

REAR
FRONT
AIR TANKS AXLE
AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4400_plan_4x2_crew_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-11
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-12
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

151.0 CF
(3836.0)
BBC
CA AF

FRONT
AXLE
66.7 REAR
(1695) AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE

111.0

(2820)
BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL 4400_side_4x2_crew_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 37.00", loaded – 33.26"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Standard Cab

FUELTANK

AFTERTREATMENT
Maintain a 3" minimum clearance
SYSTEM fore and aft of tire; in area over
the truck axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside of frame rail


AIR DRYER

AIR TANKS

REAR
FRONT
AXLE
AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4000_plan_4x2LP_standard

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-13
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-14
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Standard Cab

CF
107.0
(2718) CA AF
BBC

FRONT
AXLE

63.8
(1621) REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE

67.1
(1705)

BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL
4000_side_4x2LP_standard

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”.
4300M7 LP:Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded - 30.76”, loaded - 29.64”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
4300 LP:Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 29.93", loaded – 29.93". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM Maintain a 3" minimum clearance
fore and aft of tire; in area over
the truck axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside of frame rails

FRONT REAR
AXLE AIR TANKS AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4000_plan_4x2LP_extended

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-15
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-16
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

133 BBC CA AF
(3377.7)

FRONT
AXLE

63.8
(1620.5) REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE
93.1
(2365)

BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL
L

4000_side_4x2LP_extended

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”.
4300M7 LP: Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded - 30.76”, loaded - 29.64”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
4300 LP: Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 29.93", loaded – 29.93". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

CF

151 BBC CA AF
(3835)

FRONT
AXLE

63.8
(1620.5)
REAR
AXLE

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE
111.1
(2822)
BA
39.9 WB
(1013)
OAL
L

4000_side_4x2LP_crew

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”.
4300M7 LP: Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded - 30.76”, loaded - 29.64”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
4300 LP: Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 29.93", loaded – 29.93". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-17
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-18
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM Maintain a 3" minimum clearance
fore and aft of tire; in area over
the truck axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside of frame rail

FRONT REAR
AIR TANKS
AXLE AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4000_plan_4x2LP_crew

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Standard Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

Maintain a 3" mininum


clearance fore and aft of
tire;in area over the truck
axle (between the rails),
AFTERTREATMENT body crossmembers cannot
SYSTEM extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(1150.6)
(850.9)

* To Inside
AIR DRYER of Frame Rail

AIR TANKS

FRONT REAR
AXLE AXLE
BATTERY BOX

4400_plan_4x2LP_standard_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-19
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-20
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Standard Cab

107 BBC CF
(2718)
CA AF

FRONT
AXLE

67.7
(1720)

REAR
AXLE

[2]
[3]

GROUND LINE
67.2
(1707)

39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL

4400_side_4x2LP_standard_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded – 30.87", loaded – 29.03"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded – 32.98", loaded – 29.54"
Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 29.93", loaded – 29.93". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
Maintain a 3" mininum
clearance fore and aft of
tire;in area over the truck
axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

45.3
33.5 *
(1150.6)
(850.9)

* To Inside
of Frame Rail

REAR
FRONT AIR TANKS AXLE
AXLE

BATTERY BOX
4400_plan_4x2LP_extended_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-21
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-22
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

133 BBC CF
(3378)
CA AF

FRONT
AXLE

67.7
(1720)
REAR
AXLE

[2]
[3]

GROUND LINE
93.2
(2367)

39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL

4400_side_4x2LP_extended_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded – 30.87", loaded – 29.03"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded – 32.98", loaded – 29.54"
Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 29.93", loaded – 29.93". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

NOTE:
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
Maintain a 3" mininum
clearance fore and aft of
tire;in area over the truck
axle (between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To Inside
of Frame Rail

FRONT REAR
AIR TANKS AXLE
AXLE

BATTERY BOX

4400_plan_4x2LP_crew_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-23
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-24
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

151.0 BBC CF
(3835)
CA AF

FRONT
AXLE

67.7
(1720)
REAR
AXLE

[2]
[3]

GROUND LINE
111.1
(2822)

39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL

4400_side_4x2LP_crew_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded – 30.87", loaded – 29.03"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded – 32.98", loaded – 29.54"
Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 29.93", loaded – 29.93". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4400 6X4 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Standard Cab

FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM Maintain a 3" mininum
clearance fore and aft
of tire;in area over the
truck axle(between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside
AIR DRYER of frame rail

AIR TANKS

FRONT
REAR
AXLE
SUSPENSION

BATTERY BOX
4400_plan_6x4_standard_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-25
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-26
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 6x4 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Standard Cab

CF

107.0 BBC CA AF
(2718)

FRONT
AXLE

REAR
66.7 SUSPENSION
(1694)

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE
67.0
(1702)

BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL

4400_side_6x4_standard_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 35.29", loaded – 32.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 39.87", loaded – 38.29"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4400 6x4 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

FUEL TANK

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
Maintain a 3" mininum
clearance fore and aft
of tire;in area over the
truck axle(between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5 * 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To inside
of frame rail

AIR TANK
FRONT
AXLE REAR
SUSPENSION
BATTERY BOX

4400_plan_6x4_extended_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-27
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-28
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 6x4 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

CF

133.0 BBC CA AF
(3367)

FRONT
AXLE

66.7 REAR
(1695.1) SUSPENSION

[2] [3]

GROUND LINE
93.0
(2362)

BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL
4400_side_6x4_extended_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 35.29", loaded – 32.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 39.87", loaded – 38.29"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
4400 6x4 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

50 GALLON FUEL TANK

AIR DRYER

AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
Maintain a 3" mininum
clearance fore and aft
of tire;in area over the
truck axle(between the rails),
body crossmembers cannot
extend beyond the outside
dimension of the frame rail.

33.5* 45.3
(850.9) (1150.6)

* To Inside of
frame rail

FRONT AIR TANKS


AXLE
REAR
SUSPENSION
BATTERY BOX

4400_plan_6x4_crew_dual_mega

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-29
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-30
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 6x4 MODELS

Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

CF

151 BBC CA AF
(3835)

FRONT
AXLE

REAR
66.7 SUSPENSION
(1695)

[2] [3]

111.0 GROUND LINE


(2820)

BA
39.9 WB
(1013)

OAL
4400_side_6x4_crew_dual_mega

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 35.29", loaded – 32.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 39.87", loaded – 38.29"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.
FRONT AND REAR VIEW

All Models

115.5
(2934)
94.8
(2408)
58.6
FENDER WIDTH (1488)

18.1
(459)

35.6
(904)

69.8 (1774)
TO
HEADLAMPS

92.6 (2352)
BUMPER WIDTH
4000_front_rear

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-31
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (EGR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-32
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - ALL MODELS
CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR)
4300 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Day Cab

4300_4x2_MA025_isb_day_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded - 33.69”, loaded - 31.73”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded - 35.56”, loaded - 32.02”
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-1
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-2
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Day Cab

4300_4x2_MA025_isb_day_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4300 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

4300_4x2_MA025_isb_ext_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 35.56", loaded – 32.02"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-3
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-4
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

4300_4x2_MA025_isb_ext_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4300 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

4300_4x2_MA025_isb_crew_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 35.56", loaded – 32.02"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-5
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-6
4300 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

4300_4x2_MA025_isb_crew_cab_plan.

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Day Cab

4300LP_4x2_MH025_isb_day_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”. Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded - 30.76”, loaded
- 29.64”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-7
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-8
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Day Cab

4300_lp_4x2_MH025_isb_day_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

4300LP_4x2_MH025_isb_ext_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”. Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded - 30.76”, loaded
- 29.64”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-9
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-10
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

4300_lp_4x2_MH025_isb_ext_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

4300LP_4x2_MH025_isb_crew_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”. Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded - 30.76”, loaded
- 29.64”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-11
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-12
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4300 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

4300_lp_4x2_MH025_isb_crew_cab_plan.

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Day Cab

4400_4x2_MA035_N9_day_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded - 33.69”, loaded - 31.73”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded - 37.00”, loaded - 33.26”
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-13
4400 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-14
4400 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Day Cab

4400_4x2_MA035_N9_day_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

4400_4x2_MA035_N9_ext_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 37.00", loaded – 33.26"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-15
4400 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-16
4400 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

4400_4x2_MA035_N9_ext_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

4400_4x2_MA035_N9_crew_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 33.69", loaded – 31.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 37.00", loaded – 33.26"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-17
4400 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-18
4400 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

4400_4x2_MA035_N9_crew_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Day Cab

4400LP_4x2_MH035_N9_day_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”.
Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
4300 LP:Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 30.76", loaded – 29.64". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-19
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-20
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Day Cab

4400_lp_4x2_MH035_N9_day_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

4400LP_4x2_MH035_N9_ext_cab_lsv.

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”.
Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
4300 LP:Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 30.76", loaded – 29.64". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-21
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-22
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

4400_lp_4x2_MH035_N9_ext_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

4400LP_4x2_MH035_N9_crew_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle with STD tires: unloaded - 30.87”, loaded - 29.03”
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”.
Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with STD suspension and tires: unloaded - 32.98”, loaded - 29.54”. Subtract 4.6” with air bags dumped.
4300 LP:Frame Height at centerline of rear axle with air suspension (Code 14TBM) with standard tires: unloaded – 30.76", loaded – 29.64". Subtract 4.6" with air bags dumped.
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-23
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-24
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 LP 4X2 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

4400_lp_4x2_MH035_N9_crew_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 6x4 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Day Cab

4400_6x4_MF035_N9_day_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 35.29", loaded – 32.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 38.59", loaded – 36.19"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-25
4400 6x4 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-26
4400 6x4 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 6x4 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Day Cab

4400_6x4_MF035_N9_day_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 6x4 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Extended Cab

4400_6x4_MF035_N9_ext_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 35.29", loaded – 32.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 38.59", loaded – 36.19"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-27
4400 6x4 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-28
4400 6x4 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 6x4 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Extended Cab

4400_6x4_MF035_N9_ext_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
4400 6x4 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Side View – Crew Cab

4400_6x4_MF035_N9_crew_cab_lsv

Frame height values represent standard equipment and are intended for reference only. To compute actual frame height, refer to the frame height calculation section beginning on page 56.
[2] Frame Height at centerline of front axle: unloaded – 35.29", loaded – 32.73"
[3] Frame Height at centerline of rear axle: unloaded – 38.59", loaded – 36.19"
NOTE: Due to internal spring friction and manufacturing tolerances, these values may vary up to 0.5 inches. To achieve these nominal values directly after loading or unloading a vehicle, it may be
necessary to drive the vehicle for a short period.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-29
4400 6x4 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-30
4400 6x4 MODELS - CHASSIS DIAGRAM
4400 6x4 MODELS
Chassis Diagram
Plan View – Crew Cab

4400_6x4_MF035_N9_crew_cab_plan

NOTE: This drawing should not be used to determine crossmember locations – this information can be found later in this book.
FRONT AND REAR VIEW
All Models

4300_4400_front_rear

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-31
FRONT AND REAR VIEW - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CHASSIS DIAGRAMS (SCR) FEBRUARY 2015 — 00-32
HOOD TILT - ALL MODELS
HOOD TILT
All Models

durastar_hood_tilt

NOTE: -A fixed grill is not available on models with a Mid-High Cab and Front Frame Extensions configuration.
-A fixed grill is available on models with a Low-Cab configuration.
-The above image details the available space above the rail for component mounting.
FRAMES
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION
All Models

Introduction
The frame is the structure that carries and supports the rated load under anticipated driving conditions and secures the major components of a
vehicle in their relative positions. The frame assembly consists of two sidemembers and depending upon the length of the frame, five or more
crossmembers.u01

General Frame Recommendations


It is very important that the frame be inspected periodically for cracks, buckling, crossmember loosening or other damage that may cause
eventual failure of the frame. Additional inspections should be made whenever the chassis has been overloaded or involved in an accident. An
alignment check IS NOT SUFFICIENT since local cracks, crossmember loosening or sidemember buckling will not necessarily cause
misalignment.
On reinforced sidemember sections, when cracks exist in either of the sidemember sections, the members must be separated for repair. After
separation follow the procedures for non-reinforced sections. The two sidemember sections MUST NOT be welded together. After the weld
repairs, the sections should be reinforced with the appropriate section and re-assembled with mounting bolts tightened to SAE Grade 8 torque
levels.

Drilling or Notching
Sidemembers should not be drilled or notched without approval from Navistar Engineering. Do not exceed the maximum allowable
sidemember hole size in the unrestricted zones. For illustrations, see the Frame Drilling Restrictions later in this book.

Welding or Flame Cutting


Welding or flame cutting of the frame components is unacceptable because of the associated loss of fatigue strength. This restriction applies
not only to the heat-treated components, but also the high strength low alloy (HSLA) and low carbon steel components.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-1


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-2
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Exceptions to this are cases with Navistar Engineering approval or for repair operations as described in this service manual section.

TO AVOID SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH OR POSSIBLE ENGINE DAMAGE, WHEN WELDING OR USING AN ACETYLENE TORCH ALWAYS WEAR WELDING
GOGGLES AND GLOVES. INSURE THAT ACETYLENE AND OXYGEN TANKS ARE SEPARATED BY A METAL SHIELD AND ARE CHAINED TO A CART. DO NOT WELD OR
HEAT AREAS NEAR FUEL TANKS OR FUEL LINES. UTILIZE PROPER SHIELDING AROUND HYDRAULIC LINES.

Reinforcement to Increase Capacity


Reinforcement of the chassis frame to support either additional loading or concentrated loading does not increase vehicle load carrying
capacity unless it has been fully verified that all other vehicle components, such as the brake system, steering system, suspension system, etc.
can properly and safely support the increased loading.

Increase in Local Stress


In any modification of the chassis frame, the addition of holes, reinforcements, welds, clamps, splices, etc., may cause an increase in the local
stress in the frame at the point of the modification, THEREFORE CAUSING A STRESS CONCENTRATION IN THE FRAME SIDEMEMBER(S).
These local stress concentrations can significantly affect the life of the chassis frame. The specific effect which the stress concentrator will
have on the life of the chassis frame is influenced by the location of the stress concentration, the frequency and severity of the loading, and the
magnitude of stress concentration.
Deviation from the repair procedures in this section may void manufacturer's warranty.

Identification of Frame Rail Material


International® chassis are manufactured with frame rails of different alloy steels and some are heat-treated. Each material must be handled in a
specific manner to assure maximum service life; therefore, the frame material must be determined before attempting repair or modification.
International chassis are presently manufactured with frame rails of:
• High strength low alloy (HSLA) steel (50,000, 60,000 and 80,000 PSI yield strength)
• Heat treated steel (110,000 and 120,000 psi yield strength).
Each type has different repair procedures. The frame rail material can be determined by inspecting the frame and consulting the dealer vehicle
lineset ticket and the sales data book.
Heat-treated rails are marked on the inside of the section with a decal which cautions against welding, flame cutting or the addition of holes in
critical zones. These practices are restricted for all frame rails, however, HEAT-TREATED rails are much more sensitive to these alterations.

Frame Damage
The major sources of frame damage are accidents, overloading the vehicle, and local overstressing due to a variety of causes. In accident cases,
the reasons for the damage are readily apparent. Such damage may often be repaired by:
• Straightening and reinforcing the frame.
• Repairing the damaged area and reinforcing the frame sidemember.
• Replacing the frame sidemembers and crossmembers.
Damage to the chassis frame, such as a crack in the frame sidemember or crossmember, which is not associated with impact damage, may be an
indication of overloading the vehicle. Damage to the chassis frame may also be an indication of the creation of locally high stresses due to
operating conditions or equipment mounting practices. Examples of overloading are:
1. Exceeding either the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) (loading the frame beyond its design
capacity).
2. Uneven load distribution.
3. Improper fifth wheel settings.
4. Using the vehicle in operating conditions or with equipment it was not designed for.
Examples of creation of locally high stresses are:
1. Mounting bodies or equipment in a manner that causes stress concentrations and/or abrasive wear in either the flange or web portion of
the sidemember.
2. Improper modification or repair of frame components.
3. Equipment which is susceptible to resonant vibration due to excess flexibility of its mounting.
Frame damage may also be caused by corrosion resulting from the contact between dissimilar metals.
Damage to the chassis frame, which is not associated with impact damage, should not be repaired until the cause of the damage has been
determined and corrective actions taken to prevent re-occurrence of the non-impact damage.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-3


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-4
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Welding and Reinforcement
The guidelines below deal with the general procedures for weld repair and reinforcement. Because of the many variables associated with these
repairs, it is recommended that your field service representative be consulted prior to undertaking the repair. This will also help to determine
whether a specific set of recommendations has already been developed for the case in question.
The essential elements of repairing the sidemembers are the restoring of BOTH the shape and local strength so that the load capacity is at least
as good as before the damage occurred. The sidemembers may look like new, but may have local strength reduction due to small cracks or
material strength reduction. Even if the frame has acceptable alignment and there is no gross deformation, local deformations may reduce the
strength in the area to be weld repaired. Examples of this are local bulges in the web (vertical portion) of the section and buckling of the flanges.
These local deformations must be repaired by straightening before proceeding with the weld repair.

Welding Precautions
When welding on any vehicle, care must be taken to prevent damage to the electronic components. Vehicles with ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROL SYSTEMS require additional precautions.

CAUTION: On any vehicle, disconnect both the positive and negative battery cables from the battery before welding
on the vehicle. Attach the welder ground cable as close as possible to the part being welded.

TO AVOID SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH OR POSSIBLE ENGINE DAMAGE, WHEN WELDING OR USING AN ACETYLENE TORCH ALWAYS WEAR WELDING
GOGGLES AND GLOVES. INSURE THAT ACETYLENE AND OXYGEN TANKS ARE SEPARATED BY A METAL SHIELD AND ARE CHAINED TO A CART. DO NOT WELD
OR HEAT AREAS NEAR FUEL TANKS OR FUEL LINES. UTILIZE PROPER SHIELDING AROUND HYDRAULIC LINES.

With an electronic engine controller (such as Celect), do not connect the ground cable to the control module(s) or the cooling plate. To protect
the control module(s), it is mandatory to remove all connectors going to the control modules.
The following is a general guideline for the steel frames:
Welding of the HSLA (50,000, 60,000 and 80,000 PSI yield strength) steel side member and the heat-treated (110,000 and 120,000 PSI yield
strength) steel sidemember involves a significant reduction in the strength of the frame in the heat affected zones of the weldment. This means
that the frame in the welded region is no longer capable of carrying the same load or stress as the original section.
To restore the strength of the frame rails after welding, the welded area must be reinforced using reinforcements as indicated in “Repair and
Reinforcement Recommended Procedures”.
Welding must be done properly to make an effective repair. Therefore, only those who are properly trained and qualified should perform the
welding repairs in this section.

Reinforcement
Reinforcements (Figure 2.1 ) to increase load capacity are generally “full length”. The actual length of the reinforcement varies with the model.
Shorter, (approximately 7') rear suspension tandem liner reinforcements are available for some tractor models. Inverted “L” and “C” channel
reinforcements are available for most models. For models which do not have reinforcements necessary to contact Sales Engineering to obtain
reinforcement recommendations.

STANDARD HEAVY DUTY L-REINFORCEMENT C-REINFORCEMENT


SIDEMEMBER SECTION SIDEMEMBER SECTION SIDEMEMBER SECTION SIDEMEMBER SECTION

Figure 2.1 Frame Rails and Reinforcements (Typical) 01_0011

These reinforcements are generally installed on the outside of the sidemember, although certain models require “C” channel reinforcements
installed to the inside of the sidemember. Contact your International® Truck dealer regarding the required type of reinforcement.
Depending on model application, there will be other parts affected, such as spring brackets for example, which are bolted to the flange as well
as the web of the sidemember. To maintain proper alignment of the springs, these brackets may require replacement with new brackets
designed to accept the reinforcements. These brackets are available through your International Truck dealer parts department.
NOTE:When an inside reinforcement is added, the lengths of the crossmembers will be affected.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-5


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-6
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Reinforcement Attachment
THE REINFORCEMENTS MUST NEVER BE WELDED TO THE ORIGINAL CHASSIS SIDEMEMBERS. High strength SAE Grade 8 bolts are to be used to
fasten the reinforcement to the sidemember. Existing bolt holes in the sidemembers should be used whenever possible.
NOTE:The reinforcements should be bolted to the chassis frame using high strength SAE Grade 8 bolts not less than 0.5 inch (13 mm) in
diameter (refer to “Bolt and Torque Information”).

Corrosion
If aluminum and steel are allowed to come into direct contact with each other, a galvanic cell can be formed. In order for the cell to form, the
dissimilar metals must be in direct contact and an electrolyte, such as moisture, must be present. Aluminum is anodic with respect to steel and will
corrode when in the presence of steel. Corrosion of aluminum frame crossmembers will reduce the load carrying capacity of the frame member
and may eventually lead to the failure of the frame.
To prevent the formation of a galvanic cell, isolation techniques such as non-conductive or barrier type spacers or sealers must be used so that
the steel and aluminum are not in direct contact.
It is recommended that a sealer, such as Tectyl 400C or equivalent, be painted onto the surface of both the aluminum and steel, as well as on the
washers under the head of the bolts and nuts.

Frame Alignment
The frame must be properly aligned as this affects body, axle and suspension mounting. If the vehicle has been involved in an accident or has
been overloaded, it is recommended that the frame be checked for proper alignment.

Pre-Alignment Inspection
Before checking alignment, park vehicle on level ground and set parking brake. Inspect frame assembly for loose parts, welds, cracks and
bends. Be sure to make all necessary repairs before attempting to check frame alignment.
Method of Checking Frame Alignment
A satisfactory method of checking the frame and axle alignment, particularly when a body and cab is on a chassis, is to:
1. Place a plumb bob against the point of measurement. All measurements must be taken with the plumb bob positioned against bare metal.
2. Tack or tape pieces of paper to the floor directly under each point of measurement on the chassis as indicated by the letter “K” in
Figure 2.2.

Figure 2.2 Centerline of Chassis 01_0012

Method of Checking
After each measurement point has been carefully marked on the floor, proceed as follows:
1. Locate centerline of chassis by measuring front and rear end widths, using marks on floor.
If frame widths are within specification, draw centerline on floor, the full length of the chassis and continue with step 2.
If frame widths are out of specification, lay out centerline as follows:

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-7


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-8
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Centerline can be drawn through the intersection of any one pair of equal diagonals (A-A, B-B, C-C, D-D) and center point of one end of
frame or through points of intersection of any two pairs of equal diagonals.
2. Measure distance from centerline to opposite points marked over entire length of frame. Measurements should not vary more than 0.12
inch (3.0 mm) at any point.
3. Measuring diagonals (A-A, B-B, C-C, D-D) will indicate point where misalignment occurs. If diagonals in each pair are within 0.12 inch
(3.0 mm), that part of the frame included between points of measurement may be considered in satisfactory alignment. These diagonals
should intersect within 0.12 inch (3.0 mm) of the centerline.
If the diagonals are not within specification, try loosening and re-tightening all cross-members. Then re-check alignment. Refer to the “Bolt
Torque Chart (Phosphate and Oil Coated)”. If frame is still out of alignment, the vehicle must be taken to a suitable frame alignment
establishment to confirm frame misalignment. If misalignment is confirmed, suitable measures must be taken to repair the damage.
SIDE ELEVATION DIMENSIONS
Dimensions for side elevation of the frame should be checked at the points indicated and should not vary more than 0.12 inch (3.0 mm) from
side to side. (They will differ fore and aft due to typical frame rake.)
Axle Alignment With Frame
After determining that the frame is properly aligned, the axle alignment with the frame should be checked by comparing diagonals.
If necessary, adjust axle-to-frame alignment.

Frame Straightening
NOTE: Frame straightening should only be performed by a qualified frame alignment facility. Under no circumstance should frame alignment
be performed by inexperienced or unqualified service personnel.
DO NOT USE HEAT TO STRAIGHTEN.
Use of heat is not recommended when straightening heat-treated frame sidemembers. Heat will weaken these frame members, consequently,
all straightening should be done at room temperature. Add reinforcement per section if heat straightening is done.
Frame members which are bent or buckled sufficiently to show cracks or weakness after straightening should be replaced or reinforced. HEAT-
TREATED FRAME MEMBERS MUST NOT BE INTERMIXED WITH NON-HEAT-TREATED MEMBERS.

If one sidemember is to be replaced, the new member must match the former frame member in both cross-section and material strength.
Repair and Reinforcement Recommended Procedures
In some cases of frame damage, the sidemembers must be replaced rather than repaired. Examples of this are:
1. When sidemember cracks caused complete separation or a visible deformation of the section.
2. When the sidemembers are extensively deformed. Consult with your field service representative and frame repair specialists if in doubt.

Preparation of Frame for Repair


Bevel Crack to Weld
To assure complete weld penetration, bevel the crack from one side when welding from one side. Bevel the crack from both sides when
welding from both sides. The existing crack in the sidemember must be entirely removed (Figure 2.3). Widen the crack its full length to 1/8
inch (3 mm). If required, a rubber backed disc grinder or high speed steel burr may be used.
Clean Surface to Weld
Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent to the weld must be free of loose scale, slag, rust, grease, moisture, paint or other material that
could contribute to poor quality welds.

1. FRAME RAIL
2. WIDEN CRACK
3. BEVEL EDGES

Figure 2.3 Preparing For Weld Repair 01_0013

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-9


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-10
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Welding
Electric arc-welding is recommended for repair of steel frames. The shielded arc method should be used because the heat generated during
welding is localized and burning of material is minimized using this method. Additional advantages are that the finished weld can be ground
flush and drilled as necessary.
Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW); gas metal arc welding (GMAW), also known as metal inert gas (MIG) welding; gas tungsten arc welding
(GTAW), also known as tungsten inert gas (TIG) welding; or flux cored arc welding (FCAW) are recommended methods for repair of steel
frame members.

TO AVOID SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH OR POSSIBLE ENGINE DAMAGE, WHEN WELDING OR USING AN ACETYLENE TORCH ALWAYS WEAR WELDING
GOGGLES AND GLOVES. INSURE THAT ACETYLENE AND OXYGEN TANKS ARE SEPARATED BY A METAL SHIELD AND ARE CHAINED TO A CART. DO NOT WELD OR
HEAT AREAS NEAR FUEL TANKS OR FUEL LINES. UTILIZE PROPER SHIELDING AROUND HYDRAULIC LINES.

General Recommendations
IMPORTANT: To properly perform the repair procedure, the following rules must be observed:

All Steel Sidemembers


1. Welding should not be performed when surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, high wind or when repair personnel are exposed to
inclement conditions. Frames exposed to inclement weather must be thoroughly cleaned and dried before the repair is made.
2. Surface areas and edges to be joined must be clean and free of oil, grease, loose scale, rust, moisture, paint or other material that could
contribute to poor quality welds.
3. Always avoid craters, notching and undercutting.
4. Peen new welds prior to grinding to relieve stresses caused by shrinkage.
5. Grind all welds flush with the surrounding surfaces. Use a coarse grinder followed by smooth grind at 90° to the crack direction to
remove all of the coarse grind marks.
6. Inspect the weld repaired area carefully after grinding. Grind out any remaining cracks, notches or undercuts and repeat the finishing
and inspections.
7. For welding cracks to the edge of the sidemember flange, locate a run-off block at the edge as in to obtain a continuous weld without
undercuts. After welding, the run-off block should be cut off and the weld should be ground and inspected as in steps 5 and 6 above.
8. Weld to the edges of the holes: The weld should continue into the hole to form a plug weld with a copper chill block on the opposite side
to help form the plug. The weld should then be finished as in steps 5 and 6 above and redrilled. Chamfer the hole edges. If the hole was
open and unused, install a Grade 8 bolt to help attach the weld repair reinforcement.

INVISIBLE ULTRAVIOLET AND INFRARED RAYS EMITTED IN WELDING CAN INJURE UNPROTECTED EYES AND SKIN. PROTECTION SUCH AS WELDER'S HELMET
WITH DARK COLORED FILTER LENSES OF THE PROPER DENSITY MUST BE USED. GTAW OR TIG WELDING WILL PRODUCE INTENSE RADIATION, THEREFORE,
FILTER PLATE LENSES OF THE DEEPEST SHADE PROVIDING ADEQUATE VISIBILITY ARE RECOMMENDED. IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT PERSONS
WORKING IN THE WELD AREA WEAR FLASH SAFETY GOGGLES. ALSO WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING.

9. Electrodes: Only low hydrogen electrodes should be used. These should be purchased in hermetically sealed containers or dried for two
hours at a temperature between 450° F (232° C) and 500° F (260° C).
After drying, the electrodes should be stored in an oven at a temperature of at least 250° F (121° C). If exposed to the atmosphere for more
than four (4) hours, the electrodes should be dried before use. ANY MOISTURE INTRODUCED INTO THE WELD COULD DEVELOP POROSITY OR
EMBRITTLEMENT, LEADING TO FURTHER CRACKING. Welding procedures will vary among different frame materials. Outlined below are
recommendations for welding of the various types of frames.
1. Preheat the frame member along the prepared weld joint to 500 to 600° F (260 to 316° C). Insure the area is clean and any moisture
present is eliminated.
2. Permit heated area to cool to 200° F (93° C) or below before welding is started. The weld repair area must be clean before welding.
3. Either alternating current or direct current reversed polarity, combined with a short arc and beading or narrow weave technique, may be
used. Direct current reversed polarity is recommended.
4. Slag should be removed after each pass and an interpass temperature of 200° F (93° C) should be maintained.
5. Grind smooth and flush with surrounding sidemember material. Grind the weld in a direction that is 90° to crack direction (Figure 2.4 D).
6. Add reinforcement.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-11


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-12
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS

1. V-GROOVE INTO SOUND METAL


2. COPPER CHILL STRIP
3. FRAME RAIL
4. V-GROOVE
5. CRACK
6. WELD-GROUND FLUSH WITH
FRAME, GRIND IN LONGITUDINAL
DIRECTION OF SIDEMEMBER

Figure 2.4 Use of Chill Strip 01_0014

High Strength Low Alloy Steel Frames (50,000, 60,000 and 80,000 PSI Yield Strength)
Any of the electric arc methods previously described may be used. The choice of a suitable electrode or wire depends somewhat upon the
equipment available for welding and the method selected.
The SMAW and the GMAW methods are preferred for welding the HSLA frames. The use of low hydrogen electrodes is recommended.
Refer to Table 2.1 for selection of recommended electrodes and wires, or refer to A.W.S. A.5 standard available from www.aws.org for
equivalent strength electrodes, wires or rods and power leads to be used in the welding methods. The double V-notch weld preparation
using the weld procedure shown in Figure 2.4 is the preferred welding method.
Table 2.1 Recommended Electrodes and Wires

RECOMMENDED ELECTRODE AND WIRE


MATERIAL STRENGTH PSI
SMAW GMAW
50,000 E7018 E70S-3
60,000 – E70S-1B
80,000 E8018 E80S-D2

Amperage and voltage recommendations for welding are shown in Table 2.2 and Table 2.3

Table 2.2 SMAW Method (HSLA Frames)

WELDING CURRENT
ELECTRODE SIZES SPEED
POSITION
INCH (INCH/MIN.)
AMPERES VOLTS
Flat .125 – – –
Horizontal and Vertical .125 110/140 20/14 24

Table 2.3 GMAW Method (HSLA Frames)

WELDING CURRENT
ELECTRODE SIZES SPEED
POSITION
INCH AMPERES VOLTS (INCH/MIN.)

Flat .035 – – 350/400


Horizontal and Vertical .035 190/220 20/30 350/400

7. Preheat frame rail along the weld joint to 500 to 600° F (260 to 316° C) to insure any moisture present is eliminated and to prevent too
rapid cooling of weld metal.
8. Direct current, reversed polarity is preferred. Weld using a short arc and a beading or narrow weave technique.
9. Slag should be removed after each pass and an interpass temperature of 200° F (93° C) should be maintained.
10. Grind smooth and flush with surrounding sidemember material. Grind the weld in a direction that is at 90° to crack direction (Figure 2.4 D).
11. Add reinforcement.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-13


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-14
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Heat Treated Frames (110,000 and 120,000 PSI Yield Strength)
When welding Heat Treated Frames (110,000 PSI and 120,000 Yield Strength), use low hydrogen electrodes which have superior crack
resistance and notch toughness similar to AWS-E-11018. This type electrode should be stored in a moisture-free container to avoid porosity
during welding.
Amperage and voltage recommendations for welding are shown in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4 SMAW Method (Heat-treated Frames)

POSITION AMPERES VOLTAGE


Downhand 130/140 21/23
Overhead 130/140 21/23
Vertical Up 110/120 22/24

A heavy copper “chill” strip should be clamped to the rail side away from the groove to help control the temperature and cooling rate during
welding (Figure 2.4). Short lengths of discarded heavy copper electrical bus bars make suitable chill strips.
Preheat the frame rail along the crack area to 500-600° F (260-316° C). Either alternating current or direct current reversed polarity,
combined with a short arc and a beading or narrow weave technique may be used. Direct current reversed polarity is recommended.
Slag should be removed after each pass and an interpass temperature of 200° F (93° C) should be maintained. Grind smooth and flush with
surrounding sidemember material, in a direction that is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the sidemember (Figure 2.4 D).
A V-groove is ground from the side opposite the repair and the procedure outlined above repeated. “Chill” strips should be used whenever
possible. The V-groove ground on the opposite side of the repair should be deep enough to enter the sound metal of the first weld repair as
shown in Figure 2.4 C.
Reinforcement
The strength of the sidemember in the weld joint repair region has been reduced by welding and this region must be reinforced sufficiently to
insure that the service life of the frame is not shortened. Reinforcement of the frame after welding is intended to reduce the stresses in the weld
repair region to a lower level than was previously permitted. Improper drilling will also reduce the strength of the sidemembers. Refer to
“Drilling or Notching”.
THE TYPE, LENGTH, MATERIAL AND ATTACHMENT TECHNIQUES FOR REINFORCEMENTS VARY WITH THE TYPE AND LOCATION OF THE CRACK AND WITH
THE LOADING CONDITIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE CRACK. It is not practical to give specific recommendations for all cases of frame cracking,
therefore the various types of reinforcements are identified with general descriptions of their applications and installation procedures. To aid in
making the distinctions between the more critical flange area and the less critical web area, critical zones are defined as shown (Figure 2.5 D).

SEE FRAME DRILLING DIAGRAMS


IN SPECIFIC MODEL BOOKS FOR
MINIMAL VA
VALUE
LUE FOR A AND B

SEE FRAME DRILLING DIAGRAMS


IN SPECIFIC MODEL BOOKS FOR
MINIMAL VA
VALUE
LUE FOR A AND B

Figure 2.5 Reinforcement Application 01_0015

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-15


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-16
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Cracks which occur in the critical zones have a greater probability of growing vertically through the section, and the reduced strength after weld
repair necessitates a more substantial reinforcement.
These guidelines potentially affect the structural integrity of the frame assembly and are intended for those who have the equipment and
experience required to qualify as frame repair specialists.

General Weld Repair Reinforcement Procedures


1. The thickness and material strength of the local plate, “L” and channel reinforcements should match the section being reinforced.
2. The corners of the reinforcements which will be in contact with the sidemember along the reinforcement edges must be chamfered to
prevent damage to the sidemember.
3. All sidemember reinforcements must be bolted to the web section within the zone shown in the frame drilling guidelines in the specific
model body builder book. The bolts must be of SAE Grade 8 or better, with integral flanges or with hardened flat washers and must be tightened
to Grade 8 levels.
4. Crossmember modification or replacement may be required if the reinforcement is on the same side as the crossmember.
5. Consider the potential effects of the reinforcements on the various components mounted to the frame. Check clearances for suspension,
wiring, plumbing and other controls.
6. For attachment of reinforcements, use existing bolts wherever this is practical.
7. The weld repaired area of the sidemember and all of the reinforcement should be primed and painted before reinforcement installation. For
corrosive environments, additional treatment of the interface may be needed.

Full Length Channel Weld Repair Reinforcements


“Full length” channel reinforcements are available through International® dealers for most models. The actual length, starting location and
ending location vary from model to model. Different length reinforcements may also be available.
When applied as a repair reinforcement, these reinforcements DO NOT increase the load capacity of the vehicle. Their advantage in this case
is their availability. A disadvantage of this type is that it is likely to affect more of the components which mount to the frame. In some cases this
disadvantage may be offset by cutting the full length reinforcement to create a local reinforcement.
Recommended Applications
1. Cases of repair of vertical cracks in either the top or bottom flanges at very low mileage.
2. Cases in which the weld repair is accompanied by extensive straightening of heat treated sidemembers.

Full Length “L” Weld Repair Reinforcements


Steps 1 and 2 above also apply to the full length “L” reinforcements available from International. All of these are the inverted “L” type and are
designed for installation on the outside of the sidemember section (except 9000 Series) (Figure 2.5 A).
Recommended Applications
This type of reinforcement is recommended for cases of cracking at very low mileage where a web crack has extended beyond the range for
a flat plate reinforcement but ends short of the bend radius. It is also applicable to cases in which the cracking is accompanied by flange
buckling.
Application Procedures
1. For custom-fabricated full length “L” reinforcements, the section should be oriented up or down so that the flange is on the same side as
the damaged area.
2. For maximum strength the flange should be on the outside of the section.
3. Follow the general recommendations above for attachment of the reinforcement.

Local Channel Weld Repair Reinforcements


This type of reinforcement must be custom-fabricated either by cutting lengths from “full length” reinforcements or by forming from flat stock
(Figure 2.5 B).
Recommended Applications
1. Cases in which the weld repair extends into the sidemember flange after substantial service life.
2. Cases accompanied by extensive abrasive wear of the sidemember section. In these cases the length of the wear area should be added
to the length recommendations below.
Application Procedures
1. The channel should be installed on the outside of the section for greater strength.
2. Figure 2.5 B gives recommended dimensional data and attachment specifications for a typical installation. Holes drilled for the
attachment must be within the frame drilling guidelines in the specific model body builder book.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-17


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-18
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Local “L” or Inverted “L” Weld Repair Reinforcements
This type of reinforcement is also generally custom-fabricated. It has a greater tendency to loosen than a channel reinforcement because, for
vertical deflections of the frame assembly, it tends to bend about an axis different from that of the main sidemember section. Because of this its
length and/or attachment specifications are typically greater than for the channel type.
Recommended Applications
This type of reinforcement is recommended for cases in which the weld repair is confined to the web of the section but extends beyond the
application zone of the flat plate reinforcements shown in Figure 2.5 D.
Application Procedures
1. Figure 2.5 A shows a typical installation for an “L” reinforcement on the inside of a sidemember section along with minimum
recommended dimensions.
2. The flange of the reinforcement should be oriented up or down so that flange is on the same side as the damaged area.
3. For maximum strength the reinforcement should be installed on the outside of the sidemember section.

Flat Plate Weld Repair Reinforcements


This reinforcement is intended for the less critical, web portion of the sidemember section where typical cracking is due to local stresses which
tend to “diaphragm” or “dish” the web without creating appreciable stresses for overall bending of the section. Typical crack patterns radiate out
from the edge of a mounting bracket or crossmember or from a hole in the web. Cracks which radiate from a web hole occupied by a fastener
are frequently an indication of a defective joint, whether by the loosening of the fastener or poor joint design (Figure 2.5 C).
Recommended Applications
The flat plate reinforcements are recommended for weld repairs in which the weld does not extend beyond the zone defined in Figure 2.5 D.
Application Procedures
1. A typical installation is shown in Figure 2.5 C. The length and height of the plate will vary with the size of the weld repair area. In general
it should be such that it will accommodate an array of reinforcement attachment bolts at a typical 3 to 5 inch (76 to 127 mm) spacing all around
the weld repair area.
2. The plate should generally be installed on the side opposite the component which transferred the local bending load into the web.
3. The edges of the plate should be staggered with respect to the edges of other relatively stiff web mounted components to avoid the
creation of stress concentrations.
Bolt and Torque Information
Most frames are assembled with bolts and nuts. Others are riveted. BOLTS MUST ALWAYS BE USED WHEN ATTACHING A REINFORCEMENT. Rivets
should be replaced by bolts as required when the frame is repaired and reinforced.
In bolted joints, the majority of the load is transferred by frictional force or clamping force between the members of the joint. The bolts must be
properly tightened to develop and maintain the desired clamping force. Operation of the joint with loose or improperly tightened bolts can lead to
failure of the joint. The bolts and nuts should be inspected periodically to insure that proper torque is maintained.
Bolts of high strength material conforming to SAE Grade 8 bolts should be used on all frames. For installation of reinforcements, 0.5 inch (13 mm)
diameter flange head bolts are recommended. The SAE Grade 8 bolt is identified by six radial line markings on the head of the bolt (Figure 2.6).
Nuts must be Grade 8 flange type.

1. SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS ARE


IDENTIFIED BY 3 RADIAL
LINES
2. SAE GRADE 8 BOLTS ARE
IDENTIFIED BY 6 RADIAL
LINES

Figure 2.6 Bolt Identification 01_0016

These bolts, 0.5 inch (13 mm) diameter flange head type, should be tightened to 110 to 120 ft-lbs. (149 to 163 Nm) based on new bolts and nuts
lubricated with engine oil. Whenever possible, hold the bolt and tighten the nut.
If frame components are aluminum, flange head bolts and nuts, or bolts with hardened flat washers must be used. If modification or repair
requires replacement of existing bolts with new bolts or bolts of a greater length, the old flange head nuts should not be used with new standard
bolts.
Careful consideration is given to the number, location and sizes of frame bolt holes in the design of a vehicle. The number, location and sizes of
additional bolt holes put in the frame subsequent to manufacture of the vehicle can adversely affect frame strength. The adverse effect of
additional bolt holes can be minimized by following the guidelines.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-19


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-20
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Huckbolt Fasteners (HP 8)
Huckbolt HP 8 fasteners are used in various positions in frame rail construction. Advantages to this style fastener are consistent clamp load
and a high resistance to loosening due to vibration. The need to recheck fastener torque is eliminated.

Figure 2.7 Huckbolt Fasteners 01_0017

Removal
The swaged collar cannot be unscrewed due to the locking grooves on the HP 8 fastener. Removal requires a Huck Collar Cutter or the
collar can be split with an air chisel while supporting the opposite side of the collar. When the collar is split, the fastener can be driven out
with a punch.

Figure 2.8 Collar Can Be 01_0018


Split With an Air Chisel
CAUTION: The HP 8 fastener is not intended for re-use. To do so can result in damage to the vehicle frame or components attached to the
frame.

CAUTION: In the event that Huck fasteners are removed, in order to retain the same joint integrity, it is strongly recommended that new Huck
fasteners be used for attachment/reattachment of components.

Installation
NOTE: Huckbolt HP 8 fasteners cannot be installed without Huck installation equipment.
1. Install the HP 8 fastener into the component and frame hole.
2. Place the collar over the fastener pintail (See Figure 2.9)

Figure 2.9 Place Collar Over 01_0019


Fastener Pintail

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-21


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-22
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
3. Place the Huck installation tool over the HP 8 fastener pintail (See Figure 2.10)
2

Figure 2.10 Place Installation Tool 01_0020


Over Fastener Pintail

4. Activate the Huck installation tool.


NOTE:The Huck installation tool creates a pulling force on the fastener, seating the bolt head and closing the gap between the mating
surfaces. The collar is swaged into the pintail locking grooves developing clamping force (See Figure 2.11). As pulling forces further
increase, the body of the fastener separates at the breakneck (See Figure 2.12), completing installation.

Figure 2.11 Clamping Force is Developed 01_0021 Figure 2.12 Body of Fastener Separates at Breakneck 01_0022
Huck-Spin Fasteners
Description
Huck-Spin fasteners are used in various positions in frame rail construction. The installed fastener has a collar that is cold-worked or swaged
over the grooved pin Figure 2.13. Advantages to this style fastener are consistent clamp load and a high resistance to loosening due to
vibration. The need to recheck fastener torque is eliminated.

Figure 2.13 Huck-Spin Collar 01_0023

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-23


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-24
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Remove
The collar cannot be removed by twisting or hammering. The collar must be cut longitudinally to the extent of the swaged section. This can be
accomplished with a small wheel grinder (Figure 2.14).

Figure 2.14 Cutting Collar 01_0024


with Wheel Grinder
Drilling on opposite sides of the collar may also be used (Figure 2.15).

Figure 2.15 Drilling 01_0025


the Collar

Another method of splitting the collar is to chisel the walls of the collar (Figure 2.16).

Figure 2.16 Using a 01_0026


Chisel to Split the
Collar

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-25


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-26
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
When the collar has been opened over the length of the swaged portion on two opposite sides (Figure 2.17), the fastener can be removed.
The fastener may need to be hammered to remove the collar.

Figure 2.17 Collar 01_0027


with Reliefs for
Removal

In the event the collar doesn't come loose, use a chisel or suitable tool to peel the collar sections back (Figure 2.18).

Figure 2.18 Collar Peeled 01_0028


Back to Assist Removal
The fastener will come free when sufficient collar material has been pulled away (Figure 2.19).

Figure 2.19 Fastener Removed 01_0029

Install
The Huck-Spin is installed by spinning the collar onto the fastener. The pulling action of the Huck-Spin installation tool swages the collar into
the grooves of the fastener and then automatically disengages from the fastener (Figure 2.20).

Figure 2.20 Huck-Spin Installation 01_0030

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-27


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-28
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Special Service Tools

Hydraulic Unit – Model No. 940


Used for removal and installation of the Huck Bolt.

Figure 2.21 Hydraulic Unit 01_0031


Nose Assembly Tool

Figure 2.22 Nose Assembly Tool 01_0032

Table 2.5 Nose Assembly Tool

DESCRIPTION TOOL NUMBER


For 1/2 Dia. Fastener 99-1484
For 5/8 Dia. Fastener 99-1481

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-29


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-30
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
Hydraulic Installation Tool

Figure 2.23 Hydraulic 01_0033


Installation Tool

Table 2.6 Hydraulic Installation Tool

DESCRIPTION TOOL NUMBER


For 1/2 Dia. Fasteners 557
For 5/8 Dia. Fasteners 585

Collar Removal Tool

Table 2.7 Collar Removal Tool

DESCRIPTION TOOL NUMBER


For 1/2 Dia. Fasteners 516
For 5/8 Dia. Fasteners 520

ORDER TOOLS FROM:


Huck International, Inc. Phone: (800) 431-3091
P.O. Box 2270, One Corporate Drive Phone: (914) 331-7300
Kingston, NY 12401 Fax: (914) 334-7333
Aftermarket Modifications
Cutting the frame behind the rear axle to shorten the frame is acceptable. Mechanical cutting or sawing is preferred to torch cutting. Whenever it
is necessary to cut the frame, the sidemember should be cut at an angle of 90° to the longitudinal axis.
For information on cutting of the frames to lengthen the frames or modify the wheelbase, refer to “Wheelbase Alterations”.
Where mounting angles are to be welded to fifth wheel assemblies, refer to fifth wheel manufacturer's recommendations.
In some cases, specialized equipment such as hoists, winches, lifts, snowplows, pusher and tag axles are added to the vehicle by distributors,
installers or dealers. Unless otherwise specified by the customer at the time of assembly, the vehicle is generally equipped with a standard
chassis frame and the manufacturer has not made special allowances for the special equipment which is being added.
The addition or installation of this special equipment on the vehicle can significantly affect the loading of the chassis frame. In some cases, it may
be necessary to reinforce the frame. Care must be exercised to insure that the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) and/or the gross axle weight
ratings (GAWR) are not exceeded.
Installation of this special equipment may involve State and Federal requirements which affect vehicle certification for noise emissions, exhaust
emissions, brake requirements, lighting system requirements, etc. The specialized equipment installer is responsible for the safety and durability
of their product and, in addition, is responsible to insure that the equipment and its installation comply with all applicable State and Federal
Department of Transportation requirements and OSHA regulations.
Addition of specialized equipment may have a significant effect on other vehicle components, such as the brake system, steering system,
suspension system, etc. Simple reinforcement of the chassis frame may not be adequate to provide safe operation of the vehicle.
In any modification of the chassis frame, the addition of holes, reinforcements, welds, clamps, splices, etc. may cause an increase in the local
stress in the frame at the point of the modification. These local stress concentrations can significantly affect the life of the chassis frame. The
specific effect which the stress concentrator will have on the life of the chassis frame is influenced by the location of the stress concentration, the
frequency and severity of the loading, and the type of stress concentration. Any modification of the frame may void the manufacturer's warranty.
Refer to “Welding and Reinforcement” information.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-31


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-32
GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS

45°

CUT AT 45° ANGLE WELD AS SHOWN

Figure 2.24 Frames – Preparation of Joint for Welding Extension 01_0034

LENGTH
LENGTH OF FRAME
OF FRAME

Correct Grind Direction, Correct Grind Depth Correct Grind Direction, Incorrect Grind Depth

LENGTH LENGTH
OF FRAME OF FRAME

Incorrect Grind Direction, Correct Grind Depth Incorrect Grind Direction, Incorrect Grind Depth
Figure 2.25 Cross-sectional Views Showing Correct and Incorrect Methods of Finishing the Joint 01_0035
Wheelbase Alterations
Shortening or lengthening a wheelbase is an added expense for the customer. Therefore, it is often to the customer's benefit to order a chassis
from the factory with the desired wheelbase rather than to alter the wheelbase of the chassis on-site.
The preferred method for altering the wheelbase is to slide the rear axle forward or rearward as required. Invariably, this requires the lengthening
or shortening of air lines, brake lines, electrical lines, and driveline. Extreme care should be taken in the modification of the air lines, brake lines,
electrical lines and driveline to insure that they operate as reliably as those with which the vehicle was manufactured.
If the wheelbase is lengthened, a reinforcement may be required. Consult your International® dealer before lengthening the wheelbase.
In those instances when it is necessary to cut and weld the frame to alter the wheelbase, the frame must be reinforced with a channel-type
reinforcement of the same strength as the original frame material in the area where the frame has been cut, extending at least two feet on either
side of the cut and bolted as specified in Figure 2.5 D shown earlier in this section.
If the frame was built with both a main frame and a reinforcement, the reinforcement should be removed before cutting the main frame. IT IS
ESSENTIAL THAT A NEW ONE-PIECE OUTER CHANNEL REINFORCEMENT BE OBTAINED RATHER THAN CUTTING AND RE-USING THE ORIGINAL
REINFORCEMENT. The original frame should also be reinforced with an inner channel reinforcement, extending at least two feet beyond the cut(s)
on either side of the cut(s). The reinforcement must be of the same material as the original frame. Blank and pre-punched chassis channel
reinforcements are available through your dealer parts department.
On both medium and high strength aluminum frames, RE-WELDING TO LENGTHEN THE FRAME IS NOT RECOMMENDED. Refer to “Reinforcement” and
“Reinforcement Attachment” for additional information.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-33


GENERAL FRAME INFORMATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-34
FRAME RAIL CROSS-SECTIONS - ALL MODELS
FRAME RAIL CROSS-SECTIONS

ALL MODELS

3.062" 3.062" 3.610" 3.892"


3.062" 3.092" 3.580"

.312"
10.813"
6.495" 9.125" 9.125" 10.125" 10.250" 10.125" 10.250"
10.125"
.312"

.312"
.312" .312" .375" .312" .375"

3.580"

01CAA 01CAB 01CAC 01CAD 01CAE / 01CEK 01CAG / 01CEL 01CAH / 01CEM 01CAE / 01GBP
01_0053 01_0054 01_0055 01_0057 01_0059 01_0086
01_0056 01_0058

Side Rail & Reinforcement Descriptions [2]


Frame Key Section Modulus [1] Resisting Bending Moment
Dimensions (inches) Yield Strength
Code Material # (inches3) (In.-Lbs.)
Nominal (psi)
Depth Width Thickness Maximum Nominal Maximum Design
Straight Channel Side Rail – Kick-Up at Rear Suspension Rearward [3]
01CAA 9.125 3.062 0.312 80,000 B 11.47 10.74 917,600 859,200
Straight Channel Side Rail
01CAB 9.125 3.062 0.312 80,000 B 11.47 10.74 917,600 859,200
01CAC 10.125 3.062 0.312 50,000 B 13.31 12.64 665,500 632,000
01CAD 10.250 3.092 0.375 80,000 B 15.94 15.14 1,275,200 1,211,200
01CAE, 01CEK[4] 10.125 3.580 0.312 120,000 C 14.85 14.18 1,782,000 1,701,600
[4] 10.250 3.610 0.375 120,000 C 17.79 16.98 2,134,800 2,037,600
01CAG, 01CEL
01CAH, 01CEM[4] 10.375 3.705 0.438 120,000 C 21.05 20.11 2,526,000 2,413,200
Straight Channel Side Rail with Outer “C”Channel Reinforcement
01CAE 10.125 3.580 0.312 120,000 C
31.72 29.84 3,806,400 3,580,800
01GBP 10.813 3.892 0.312 120,000 C
NOTES:
B = High Strength Low Alloy Steel C = Heat Treated Alloy Steel
[1]=Section Modulus: Nominal – Calculated using design dimensions; indicates the design load capacity of the frame
Maximum Tolerance – All frame dimensions are at maximum tolerance; used by some competitors as advertised values.
[2]=Reinforcement dimensions and specifications are shown in italics
[3]=Rail depth given is for base rail… depth of kick-up in AF section is 6.495"
[4]=33,000-lb GVWR only

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-35


FRAME RAIL CROSS-SECTIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-36
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - LP AND 4x2 - STANDARD CAB
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

LP and 4x2 - Standard Cab


Wheelbase Range G
AX BX [3] CX 33.5
Min Max D F (851)
A B C
Inches (Millimeters) E
BETWEEN FRAME
RAILS
AX BX CX
up to 138 (3500) – – –
140 156 19
– –
(3550) (3950) (489)
158 169 28 8.2
– – 25.0 (209)
(4000) (4300) (713) (635) 92.1
TO BACK OF CAB G H
(2339)
171 183 37 J
– –
(4350) (4650) (937) CENTER LINE
TO CENTER LINE CENTER LINE
FRONT SPRING EYE REAR AXLE
FRONT AXLE AF
185 195 43 (1161) [1] – [1] WB
– 10.6
(4700) (4950) 19 (489) [2] 35 (896) [2]
STRAIGHT RAIL
L
197 211 35

(5000) (5350) (896)
30.9 29.3
213 224 37

(5400) (5700) (937) 53
226 236 (1344)
– KICK-UP RAIL
L
10.6 8.4
(5750) (6000)
LP MODELSS
238 254 46 (1161) [1] 62 (1568) [1] – [1]
(6050) (6450) 28 (713) [2] 35 (896) [2] 44 (1120) [2]
29.9 28.3
256 266 44
(6500) (6750) (1120) 44 G

268 280 (1120)


A B C SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD
(6800) (7100) 53
282 293 (1344) D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
(7150) (7450) 37 62
E WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
295 307 (937) (1568)
DOWN AND WEB FORWARD. WITH KICK-UP RAILS − C-CHANNEL AF CROSSMEMBER
(7500) (7800)
F WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
G
309 321 62 DOWN AND WEB FORWARD
(7850) (8150) (1568) 71 01_0060
323 331 (1792)
(8200) (8400)
[1] With I6 Engines [2] With V8 Engines, 4x2 Models only
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

4x2 - Standard Cab with Staggered Fuel Tanks


Wheelbase Range
AX BX [3] CX
Min Max
Inches (Millimeters)
up to 138 (3500) – – –
140 169 22
– –
(3550) (4300) (567)
171 183 31
– –
(4350) (4650) (791)
177
27
(4500)[1 –
(695)
– –
]

185 195 40
– –
(4700) (4950) (1015)
197 211 41

(5000) (5350) 31 (1042)
212 236 (791) 59

(5400) (6000) (1490)
238 254 40 67

(6050) (6450) (1015) (1714)
256 266
(1266)
(6500) (6750) 44
268 280 (1120)
(6800) (7100) 59
282 293 (1490)
(7150) (7450) 31 62
295 307 (791) (1568)
(7500) (7800)
309 321 67
(7850) (8150) (1714) 71
323 331 (1792)
(8200) (8400)
[1] With 04WZA
durastar_ddcrossmember

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-37


INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 4x2 - STANDARD CAB WITH STAGGERED FUEL TANKS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-38
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - LP AND 4x2 - EXTENDED CAB
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

LP and 4x2 - Extended Cab


Wheelbase Range G
AX BX CX
Min Max A B C
D
F 33.5
(851)
Inches (Millimeters) AX BX CX E
BETWEEN
FRAME RAILS
up to 169 (4300) – – –
171 183 11
– –
(4350) (4650) (277)

185 195 20 (501) [1] 25.0 7.8


– – (635) 118.1 (197)
(4700) (4950) 29 (725) [2] (3000) TO BACK OF CAB G H
TO CENTER LINE
197 211 35 FRONT SPRING EYE J

(5000) (5350) (896)
CENTER LINE CENTER LINE
213 224 11 FRONT AXLE REAR AXLE
WB AF
(5400) (5700) (277) 53 10.6
226 236 (1344) STRAIGHT RAIL

(5750) (6000)

238 254 20 (501) [1] 62 (1568) [1] 30.9 29.3



(6050) (6450) 37 (949) [2]
44 (1120) [2]
256 266 44 KICK-UP RAIL 8.4
10.6
(6500) (6750) (1120) 44 LP MODELS

268 280 (1120)


(6800) (7100) 11 53
282 293 (277) (1344) 29.9 28.3

(7150) (7450) 62
G
295 307 (1568)
(7500) (7800) A B C SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD
62
309 311 20 (1568) 53 D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
(7850) (7900) (501) (1344)
E WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
[1] With I6 Engines
DOWN AND WEB FORWARD. WITH KICK-UP RAILS − C-CHANNEL AF CROSSMEMBER
[2] With V8 Engines WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
F G
DOWN AND WEB FORWARD
01_0061
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

4x2 - Extended Cab with Staggered Fuel Tanks


Wheelbase Range
AX BX CX
Min Max
Inches (Millimeters)
up to 169 (4300) – – –
171 195
– –
(4350) (4950)
197 211 32

(5000) (5350) (818)
213 236 50

(5400) (6000) (1266)
238 254 67

(6050) (6450) (1714)
256 266 14 41
(6500) (6750) (355) (1042) 44
268 280 (1120)
(6800) (7100) 50
282 293 (1266)
(7150) (7450) 62
295 307 59 (1568
(7500) (7800) (1490)
309 311 68 53
(7850) (7900) (1714) (1344)

durastar_ddcrossmember

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-39


INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 4x2 - EXTENDED CAB WITH STAGGERED FUEL TANKS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-40
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - LP AND 4x2 - CREW CAB
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

LP and 4x2 - Crew Cab


Wheelbase Range G
AX BX
Min Max B D
F 33.5
A E (851)
Inches (Millimeters) BETWEEN
AX BX FRAME RAILS
up to 183 (4650) – –
185 195 19

(4700) (5000) (494)
197 211 28 25.0 8.0
– (635) 136.0 (204) G H
(5050) (5350) (718) (3455) TO BACK OF CAB
J
213 224 37 TO CENTER LINE
– FRONT SPRING EYE
(5400) (5700) (942)
CENTER LINE
226 236 55 CENTER LINE REAR AXLE

(5750) (6100) (1390) FRONT AXLE WB AF

238 254 19
10.6
(6150) (6450) (494)
STRAIGHT RAIL
256 266 37 44
(6500) (6750) (942) (1120)
268 280 46 30.9 29.3
(6800) (7100) (1166)
282 293 53
(7150) (7450) 55 (1344) 10.6 8.4
KICK-UP RAIL
295 321 (1390) 62 LP MODELS
(7500) (8150) (1568)
29.9 28.3

A B
SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD
D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
E
DOWN AND WEB FORWARD. WITH KICK-UP RAILS − C-CHANNEL AF CROSSMEMBER

F G WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE DOWN AND
WEB FORWARD
01_0062
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

4x2 - Crew Cab with Staggered Fuel Tanks


Wheelbase Range
AX BX
Min Max
Inches (Millimeters)
up to 183 (4650) – –
185 195 19

(4700) (5000) (494)
197 211 28

(5050) (5350) (718)
213 224 37

(5400) (5700) (942)
226 236 55

(5750) (6100) (1390)
238 254 19
(6150) (6450) (494)
256 266 37 44
(6500) (6750) (942) (1120)
268 280 46
(6800) (7100) (1166)
282 293 53
(7150) (7450) 55 (1344)
295 321 (1390) 62
(7500) (8150) (1568)

durastar_ddcrossmember

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-41


INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 4x2 - CREW CAB WITH STAGGERED FUEL TANKS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-42
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 6x4 - STANDARD CAB
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

6x4 - Standard Cab


Wheelbase Range G
AX BX CX A B C
F
Min Max D
E
Inches (Millimeters) AX BX CX

up to 158 (4000) – – – +

160 197 19
– –
(4050) (5000) (489)
+
199 211 37 8.2
– – 25.0 33.5
(5050) (5350) (937) (635)
(209)
(851) G H J
TO BACK OF CAB
BETWEEN FRAME
213 224 46 92.1 RAILS
– –
(5400) (5700) (1161) (2340)
TO CENTER LINE
226 238 35 FRONT SPRING EYE

(5750) (6050) 37 (896)
240 252 (937)

(6100) (6400) 44 CENTER LINE CENTER LINE
254 266 (1120) FRONT AXLE REAR SUSPENSION
– WB AF
(6450) (6750)
11.6
268 280 46 53 (295)

(6800) (7100) (1161) (1344) STRAIGHT RAIL
+ +
282 293 62 26
(7150) (7450) (1568) (672)
295 307 35 53.8 49.2
(7500) (7800) (896) (1367) (1249)
53
309 321 37 44 (1344)
(7850) (8150) (937) (1120) A B C SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD

323 331 53 62
D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER − DOUBLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER
(8200) (8400) (1344) (1568)

E F G STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP 01_0063


INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

6x4 - Standard Cab with Staggered Fuel Tanks


Wheelbase
Range AX BX CX
Min Max
Inches (Millimeters)
up to 157 (4000) – – –
160 197 23
– –
(4050) (5000) (567)
199 211 31
– –
(5050) (5350) (791)
213 224 40
– –
(5400) (5700) (1015)
226 238 41

(5750) (6050) 31 (1042)
240 252 (791)

(6100) (6400) 50
254 266 (1266)

(6450) (6750)
268 280 40 59

(6800) (7100) (1015) (1490)
282 293 67 26
(7150) (7450) (1714) (672)
295 307 41
(7500) (7800) (1042) 53
309 321 31 50 (1344)
(7850) (8150) (791) (1266)
323 331 59 62
(8200) (8400) (1490) (1568)

durastar_ddcrossmember

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-43


INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 6x4 - STANDARD CAB WITH STAGGERED FUEL TANKS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-44
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 6x4 - EXTENDED CAB
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

6x4 - Extended Cab


Wheelbase Range G
AX BX CX
Min Max D F
A B C
Inches (Millimeters) E
AX BX CX
up to 197 (5000) – – – +
199 211 11
– –
(5050) (5350) (277)
213 224 20 +
– – 7.8
(5400) (5700) (501) 25.0 (197) 33.5
(635)
226 238 35 TO BACK OF CAB (851)
– BETWEEN G H J
(5750) (6050) 11 (896)
118.1 FRAME RAILS
240 252 (277) 3000

(6100) (6400) 44 TO CENTER LINE
FRONT SPRING EYE
254 266 (1120)

(6450) (6750)
268 280 20 53

(6800) (7100) (501) (1344)
CENTER LINE CENTER LINE
282 293 62 26 FRONT AXLE REAR SUSPENSION
WB AF
(7150) (7450) (1568) (672)
295 307 35 11.6
(295)
(7500) (7800) (896) 53
STRAIGHT RAIL
309 321 11 44 (1344)
+ +
(7850) (8150) (277) (1120)
323 331 53 62
(8200) (8400) (1344) (1568) 53.8 49.2
(1367) (1249)

A B C SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD

D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER − DOUBLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER

E F G STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP


01_0064
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

6x4 - Extended Cab with Staggered Fuel Tanks


Wheelbase
Range AX BX CX
Min Max
Inches (Millimeters)
up to 224
– –
(5700)
226 238 32

(5750) (6050) (818)
240 252 41

(6100) (6400) (1042)
254 266 50

(6450) (6750) (1266)
268 280 14 59

(6800) (7100) (355) (1490)
282 293 67 26
(7150) (7450) (1714) (672)
295 307 32
(7500) (7800) (818) 53
309 321 41 (1344)
(7850) (8150) (1042)
323 331 50 62
(8200) (8400) (1266) (1568)

durastar_ddcrossmember

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-45


INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 6x4 - EXTENDED CAB WITH STAGGERED FUEL TANKS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-46
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 6x4 - CREW CAB
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

6x4 - Crew Cab


Wheelbase Range G
AX BX
Min Max B D
F 33.5
(851)
A E
Inches (Millimeters) AX BX
BETWEEN
FRAME RAILS

up to 211 (5350) – –
213 224

(5400) (5700) 28
25.0 8.0
226 238 (718) (635) 136.0 (204) G H
– (3455) TO BACK OF CAB
(5750) (6050) J
TO CENTER LINE
240 252 37 FRONT SPRING EYE

(6100) (6400) (942) CENTER LINE
CENTER LINE REAR AXLE
254 266 46 FRONT AXLE WB AF

(6450) (6750) (1166)
10.6
268 280 55 26
(6800) (7100) (1390) (672) STRAIGHT RAIL

282 293 44
(7150) (7450) 28 (1120) 30.9 29.3
295 307 (718)
(7500) (7800) 53
(1344) 10.6 8.4
309 321 37 KICK-UP RAIL
(7850) (8150) (942) LP MODELS

29.9 28.3

A B
SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD
D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
E
DOWN AND WEB FORWARD. WITH KICK-UP RAILS − C-CHANNEL AF CROSSMEMBER

F G WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE DOWN AND
WEB FORWARD
01_0060
INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION

6x4 - Crew Cab with Staggered Fuel Tanks


Wheelbase Range
AX BX
Min Max
Inches (Millimeters)
up to 211 (5350) – –
213 224

(5400) (5700) 28
226 238 (718)

(5750) (6050)
240 252 37

(6100) (6400) (942)
254 266 46

(6450) (6750) (1166)
268 280 55 26
(6800) (7100) (1390) (672)
282 293 44
(7150) (7450) 28 (1120)
295 307 (718)
(7500) (7800) 53
309 321 37 (1344)
(7850) (8150) (942)

durastar_ddcrossmember

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-47


INTERMEDIATE CROSSMEMBER LOCATION - 6x4 - CREW CAB WITH STAGGERED FUEL TANKS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-48
AF CROSSMEMBER LOCATIONS - LP AND 4X2
AF CROSSMEMBER LOCATIONS

LP and 4x2
WITH STRAIGHT RAILS
G
AF Range 33.5
G H J D F (851)
Crossmember Min Max A B C
E
BETWEEN FRAME
Inches (Millimeters) AX BX CX
RAILS

85
1 – –
(2150)
116 175 53 8.2
2 – 25.0 (209)
(2950) (4450) (1338) 92.1
31 (800) (635) TO BACK OF CAB G H
(2339)
144 J
3 31 (800)
(3650) CENTER LINE
TO CENTER LINE CENTER LINE
FRONT SPRING EYE REAR AXLE
FRONT AXLE WB AF

10.6

WITH LP RAILS STRAIGHT RAIL


L

AF G 30.9 29.3
Crossmember
Inches (Millimeters)
96 51
1 KICK-UP RAIL
L
10.6 8.4
(2450) (1298)
LP MODELSS

29.9 28.3

A B C SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD

D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER

E WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
DOWN AND WEB FORWARD. WITH KICK-UP RAILS − C-CHANNEL AF CROSSMEMBER

F WITH STRAIGHT RAILS − SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE
G
DOWN AND WEB FORWARD
01_0060
AF CROSSMEMBER LOCATIONS

6x4
WITH 52” SPREAD SUSPENSION
G
A B C
AF Range F
G H J D
E
Crossmember Min Max AX BX CX

Inches (Millimeters) +

104
1 – –
(2650) +

134 175 72 8.2


25.0 33.5
2 – (635)
(209)
(851) G H J
(3400) (4450) (1838) TO BACK OF CAB
BETWEEN FRAME
30 (750) 92.1 RAILS
163 (2340)
3 30 (750)
(4150) TO CENTER LINE
FRONT SPRING EYE

CENTER LINE CENTER LINE


WITH 55” AND 60” SPREAD SUSPENSION FRONT AXLE REAR SUSPENSION
WB AF

AF Range 11.6
G H J (295)
Crossmember Min Max STRAIGHT RAIL
+ +
Inches (Millimeters)
112
1 – – 53.8 49.2
(2650) (1367) (1249)

142 175 80
2 – A B C
(3600) (4450) (2038) SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP AND WEB FORWARD
30 (750)
171
3 30 (750) D REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER − DOUBLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER
(4350)

E F G STAMPED CROSSMEMBER MOUNTED WITH FLAT FLANGE UP


01_0063

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-49


AF CROSSMEMBER LOCATIONS - 6X4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-50
CROSSMEMBERS - ALL MODELS
CROSSMEMBERS

All Models

3.2 3.8
1.9 (81)
(48) (97)
+ 3.2
(81)
5.8
(147) 1.9
33.5 11.6 (48)
(851) 3.0 (295) 4.6
(117) 33.5
(76) 8.4 5.8 (851)
(214) (147)

4.8 8.1
(122) (206)
SINGLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER DOUBLE STAMPED CROSSMEMBER
1.7
(42)
1.4
(36) 2.4
(61)

33.5 5.9 4.8


(851) (149) 2.4 (122)
.9 6.8 (60)
25.0 4.3 (24) (173)
2.4 (635) (108)
(62) 2.4 .374 MATL THK END FACE FLAT AREA
(61) (9)
10.1
(257)
16.2
(412)
4.8
6.7 1.9
(122) (4.8)
(170) 3.8
(96)
7.6
REAR CAB MOUNTING CROSSMEMBER (192)

01_0066
Crossmembers With Tapered Rails

LP

5.0
(127)
1.2
(30) 8.4 6.0
(213) 1.3
(152)
(33)

3.0 33.5
2.2 (76) (851)
7.4 (56)
(188)
33.5
(851)

3.2
(82)
6.8 31.5
(800)
26.7 (173) 4.6
(678) .8 (117)
(20)

.7
(17) 5.4
(137)
4.8 3.0
5.3 1.2
(122) (76)
(135) (30)
1.2
(29)

“C” CHANNEL REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER “C” CHANNEL AF CROSSMEMBER

01_0067

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-51


CROSSMEMBERS WITH TAPERED RAILS - LP
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-52
FRAME DRILLING GUIDELINES - ALL MODELS
FRAME DRILLING GUIDELINES

All Models
The drilling of the frame sidemember presents no unusual difficulty. Standard high speed steel drills of good quality will serve provided they are
sharpened properly and not overheated during sharpening or use.

Hole Location Guidelines


1. Never drill holes into the restricted areas of the frame rails. Refer to diagrams on the following pages.
2. Use existing holes whenever possible.
3. Maintain a minimum of 0.75 inch (19 mm) of material between holes.
4. There should not be more than three holes located on a vertical line.
5. Bolt holes should be no larger than is required for the size of bolts being used, in no instance larger than 11/16 (.688 inch).
6. If reinforcements are used, avoid drilling holes closer than 2.0 inches (51 mm) from the ends of the reinforcement.
7. Bolts must be periodically checked to insure that the proper torque and clamping force is maintained.
8. Never drill any holes in the flanges of the frame rail.
FRAME DRILLING RESTRICTIONS
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 6x4
Straight Rails/Straight Trucks

1.6
(41)
NO DRILL ZONE
1.6
(41) C CENTERLINE CENTERLINE
REAR SUSPENSION OF DRILLED HOLES

2.0
10.0 2.0 (51) SECTION C − C
(254) (51) C

01_0068

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-53


FRAME DRILLING RESTRICTIONS - 4300 4X2, 4400 4X2 AND 6X4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-54
FRAME DRILLING RESTRICTIONS - LP
FRAME DRILLING RESTRICTIONS

LP
Tapered Rails

1.5
(38)
NO DRILL ZONE
D CENTERLINE CENTERLINE
1.5
(38) REAR SUSPENSION OF DRILLED HOLES

10.0 1.5
(254) 2.0
B (51) (38) C B OR C
D SECTION D − D

01_0069
MAXIMUM WHEELBASE FRAME STRETCHING

All Models
Frames – Maximum Wheelbase Figures For Changing Wheelbase
Maximum Frame Maximum Front Axle/Susp.
Frame Code Frame Description Maximum Wheelbase
GVW Rating (Lbs) Capacity (Lbs)
5/16" x 9 1/8" Tapered Rail
01CAA 29,000 8,000 254
80 psi Yield Strength

5/16" x 9 1/8" Straight Rail 8,000 285


01CAB 25,999
80 psi Yield Strength 10,000/12,000 262
8,000 311
25,999
10,000/12,000 293
5/16" x 10 1/8" Straight Rail
01CAC 29,000 8,000 285
50 psi Yield Strength
10,000 260
32,900
12,000 171
10,000 311
32,900
3/8" x 10 1/4" Straight Rail 12,000 272
01CAD
80 psi Yield Strength 33,000 10,000 260
38,000 12,000 171
50,000 10,000 283
5/16" x 10 1/8" Straight Rail
01CAE/01CEK 52,000 12,000 238
120 psi Yield Strength
54,000 14,000 167
50,000 10,000 311
3/8" x 10 1/4" Straight Rail
01CAG/01CEL 52,000 12,000 266
120 psi Yield Strength
54,000 14,000 230
50,000 10,000 311
7/16" x 10 3/8" Straight Rail
01CAH/01CEM 52,000 12,000 293
120 psi Yield Strength
54,000 14,000 256
5/16" x 10 1/8" Straight Rail with 5/16” x 10-13/16”
01CAE w/01GBP Outer “C” Channel Reinforcement 54,000 14,000 311
120 psi Yield Strength

Contact your local International dealer for approval if your wheelbase or axle load exceeds the values given.
See General Frame information – Aftermarket Modifications, earlier in this section.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-55


MAXIMUM WHEELBASE FRAME STRETCHING - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-56
FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT CENTERLINE OF FRONT AXLE - ALL MODELS
FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT CENTERLINE OF FRONT AXLE

All Models
The front frame height (@ the centerline of the front axle) may be calculated using the following equations. Refer to the illustration for a visual
explanation of the symbols used in these calculations.
Df = Wheel axis to bottom of frame in unladen position. Refer to
tabulated data.
Df′ = Wheel axis to bottom of frame in loaded position. Refer to tabulated
data.
F= Frame rail height. Refer to tabulated data.
′ SLR = Static Loaded Radius. The distance from the wheel axis to the
ground for a properly inflated, fully loaded (loaded to its maximum
capacity) tire. To obtain tire dimensions, contact the tire

manufacturer.
R1 = Tire Radius (one half of tire outside diameter) NOT mounted on the
vehicle. To obtain tire dimensions, contact the tire manufacturer.
R2 = Calculated Tire Radius on an unloaded chassis. The value of R2 is
calculated using the following method.
R 2 = R 1 – .2 ( R 1 – SLR )
01_0071 Y= Front Frame Height at the front axle centerline in unloaded
condition.
Y′= Front Frame Height at the front axle centerline in loaded condition.

Y = Df + R2 + F (for unloaded condition)

Y′ = D f ′ + SLR + F (for loaded condition)

NOTE: Values calculated for Y and Y′ are strictly for the frame height at the
front axle centerline. For frame heights at the front of the frame rail,
refer to “FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT FRONT AND REAR
RAIL ENDS”.
FRAME HEIGHT DATA – FRONT

All Models

Front Suspension Spindle To Bottom Of Frame Model


Type Capacity Code Unloaded – Dr Loaded – Dr′ LP 4x2 6x4
5.5" 4.5" X X
8,000-lb 03ADA
12.4” 12.2”
9,000-lb 03AGW 6.6” 5.6” X X
7.1" 5.5" X X
10,000-lb 03ADB
12.4” 11.5”
Parabolic
11,000-lb 03AGE 7.1” 5.5” X
12,000-lb 03ADC 7.5" 5.6" X
13,000-lb 03AGS 7.1” 5.5” X
14,000-lb 03ADD 7.4" 5.7" X
14,600-lb 03AGT 7.58” 6.1” X
* Top of standard frame in model
Adjust dimensions for optional frame reinforcements – See Frame Section

Frame Rail
Frame Code Frame Description
Height (F)
01CAA 5/16" x 9 1/8" Tapered Rail – 80 psi Yield Strength 9.125"
01CAB 5/16" x 9 1/8" Straight Rail – 80 psi Yield Strength 9.125"
01CAC 5/16" x 10 1/8" Straight Rail – 50 psi Yield Strength 10.125"
01CAD 3/8" x 10 1/4" Straight Rail – 80 psi Yield Strength 10.250"
01CAE/01CEK 5/16" x 10 1/8" Straight Rail – 120 psi Yield Strength 10.125"
01CAG/01CEL 3/8" x 10 1/4" Straight Rail – 120 psi Yield Strength 10.250"
01CAH/01CEM 7/16" x 10 3/8" Straight Rail – 120 psi Yield Strength 10.375"

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-57


FRAME HEIGHT DATA – FRONT - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-58
FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT CENTERLINE OF REAR AXLE - ALL MODELS
FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT CENTERLINE OF REAR AXLE
All Models
The rear frame height (@ the centerline of the rear axle) may be calculated using the following equations. Refer to the illustration for a visual
explanation of the symbols used in these calculations.
Dr = Wheel axis to bottom of frame in unladen position. Refer to tabulated
data.
D r′ = Wheel axis to bottom of frame in loaded position. Refer to tabulated
data.
′ F= Frame rail height. Refer to tabulated data.
′ SLR = Static Loaded Radius. The distance from the wheel axis to the ground
for a properly inflated, fully loaded (loaded to its maximum capacity)
tire. To obtain tire dimensions, contact the tire manufacturer.
R1 = Tire Radius (one half of tire outside diameter) NOT mounted on the
vehicle. To obtain tire dimensions, contact the tire manufacturer.
01_0072 R2 = Calculated Tire Radius on an unloaded chassis. The value of R2 is
calculated using the following method.

R 2 = R 1 – .2 ( R 1 – SLR )
Z= Rear Frame Height at the rear axle centerline in unloaded condition.
Z′= Rear Frame Height at the rear axle centerline in loaded condition.

Z = Dr + R2 + F (for unloaded condition)

Z′ = D r ′ + SLR + F (for loaded condition)

NOTE: Values calculated for Z and Z′ are strictly for the frame height at the rear
axle centerline. For frame heights at the rear of the frame rail, refer to
“FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT FRONT AND REAR RAIL ENDS”.
BUMP HEIGHTS – REAR

All Models
“Bump Height” refers to the maximum distance of the tires above the side rails as the rear axle of the truck travels over an object. Bump Heights are
important in the selection of truck bodies since it may be necessary to incorporate wheelwells into the body floor to allow adequate clearance for tire
travel.
STRAIGHT BUMP HEIGHT IS USED WHEN BOTH SETS OF WHEELS TRAVEL OVER AN COCKED BUMP HEIGHT REFERS TO THE CONDITION THAT EXISTS WHEN ONLY ONE SET
OBJECT AT THE SAME TIME, SUCH AS A PARKING LOT SPEED BUMP. OF REAR WHEELS TRAVELS OVER AN OBJECT — AN EXAMPLE OF THIS WOULD BE
CLIMBING OVER A CURB WHEN TURNING A CORNER. THE COCKED BUMP HEIGHT
CHARTS PRESENTED HERE ASSUME A 7° DEFLECTION FROM HORIZONTAL.

01_0073 01_0074

DR″= Wheel Axis to bottom of frame in straight bump position. Refer to tabulated data.
R1 = Tire radius (one-half of tire outside diameter) NOT mounted on the vehicle. To obtain tire dimensions, contact the tire manufacturer.
F= Frame Rail Height.
Straight Bump Height = R1 - Dr″ - F
Cocked Bump Height = Straight Bump Height + 3.5 In.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-59


BUMP HEIGHTS – REAR - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-60
FRAME AND BUMP HEIGHT DATA – REAR - ALL MODELS
FRAME AND BUMP HEIGHT DATA – REAR

All Models
Frame Rail Height Rear Suspension Spindle to Bottom of Sidemember
Model Frame Code
(F) Type Capacity Unloaded – Dr Loaded – Dr′ Bump – Dr″
12,000
LP 01CAA 9.125" Air 15,500 5.30" ± .25" – –
18,500
01CAC 10.125" 9.26" ± .25" 9.26" ± .25"
01CAD 10.250" 9.38" ± .25" 9.38" ± .25"
4x2 (non-LP) 01CAE 10.125" Air 20,000 to 23,000 9.26" ± .25" 9.26" ± .25" –
01CAG 10.250" 9.38" ± .25" 9.38" ± .25"
01CAH 10.375" 9.51" ± .25" 9.51" ± .25"
01CAE 10.125" 9.26" ± .25" 9.26" ± .25"
6x4 01CAG 10.250" Air 40,000 9.38" ± .25" 9.38" ± .25" –
01CAH 10.375" 9.51" ± .25" 9.51" ± .25"
LP 01CAA 9.125" Vari-Rate 13,500 6.6" ± .50" 3.75" ± .50" 1.9" ± .50"
01CAB 9.125" 7.31" ± .50"
01CAC 10.125" 8.31" ± .50"
01CAD 10.250" 8.43" ± .50"
4x2 (non-LP) Vari-Rate 13,500 – –
01CAE 10.125" 8.31" ± .50"
01CAG 10.250" 8.43" ± .50"
01CAH 10.375" 8.56" ± .50"
LP 01CAA 9.125" Vari-Rate 15,500 6.66" ± .50" 4.01" ± .50" 1.81" ± .50"
01CAB 9.125" 6.37" 3.79" 1.59"
01CAC 10.125" 7.37" 4.79" 2.59"
01CAD 10.250" 7.49" 4.92" 2.72"
4x2 (non-LP) Vari-Rate 15,500
01CAE 10.125" 7.37" 4.79" 2.59"
01CAG 10.250" 7.49" 4.92" 2.72"
01CAH 10.375" 7.62" 5.04" 2.84"
FRAME AND BUMP HEIGHT DATA – REAR (CONTINUED)
Frame Rail Height Rear Suspension Spindle to Bottom of Sidemember
Model Frame Code
(F) Type Capacity Unloaded – Dr Loaded – Dr′ Bump – Dr″
LP 01CAA 9.125" Vari-Rate 18,500 7.78" 4.48" 2.2"
01CAB 9.125" 7.81" 5.03" 2.83"
01CAC 10.125" 8.81" 6.03" 3.83"
01CAD 10.250" 8.93" 6.16" 3.96"
4x2 (non-LP) Vari-Rate 18,500
01CAE 10.125" 8.81" 6.03" 3.83"
01CAG 10.250" 8.93" 6.16" 3.96"
01CAH 10.375" 9.06" 6.28" 4.08"
LP 01CAA 9.125" Vari-Rate 20,000 8.125" 4.75" 2.5"
01CAB 9.125" 8.26" ± .50" 5.31" 3.13"
01CAC 10.125" 9.26" ± .50" 6.31" 4.13"
01CAD 10.250" 9.38" ± .50" 6.44" 4.26"
4x2 (non-LP) Vari-Rate 20,000
01CAE 10.125" 9.26" ± .50" 6.31" 4.13"
01CAG 10.250" 9.38" ± .50" 6.44" 4.26"
01CAH 10.375" 9.51" ± .50" 6.56" 4.38"
01CAB 9.125”
01CAC 10.125" 9.68" 6.13" 3.93"
01CAD 10.250" 9.81" 6.26" 4.06"
4x2 (non-LP) Vari-Rate 23,500
01CAE 10.125" 9.68" 6.13" 3.93"
01CAG 10.250" 9.81" 6.26" 4.06"
01CAH 10.375" 9.93" 6.38" 4.18"

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-61


FRAME AND BUMP HEIGHT DATA – REAR - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-62
FRAME AND BUMP HEIGHT DATA – REAR - ALL MODELS
FRAME AND BUMP HEIGHT DATA – REAR (CONTINUED)

Frame Rail Height Rear Suspension Spindle to Bottom of Sidemember


Model Frame Code
(F) Type Capacity Unloaded – Dr Loaded – Dr′ Bump – Dr″
01CAD 10.250" 10.18" 6.24" 4.24"
01CAE 10.125" 10.06" 6.12" 4.12"
4x2 (non-LP) Vari-Rate 31,000
01CAG 10.250" 10.18" 6.24" 4.24"
01CAH 10.375” 10.43” 6.49” 4.49”
4x2 (non LP) 01CAE 10.125” Chalmers 1030 30,000
01CAE 10.125”
6x4 01CAG 10.250” Multileaf 34,000
01CAH 10.375”
01CAE 10.125" 10.88" ± .50" 9.50" ± .50" 8.10" ± .50"
6x4 01CAG 10.250" Multileaf 40,000 11.03" ± .50" 9.63" ± .50" 8.23" ± .50"
01CAH 10.375" 11.15" ± .50" 9.75" ± .50" 8.35" ± .50"
FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT FRONT AND REAR RAIL ENDS

All Models
Now that we have learned to calculate the frame height at both the front and rear axle centerlines, we can determine the frame height values at both
rail ends.

′ ′

′ ′

FIRST WE MUST DETERMINE THE RAKE OF THE FRAME (I.E., THE SLOPE OF THE FRAME FOR SITUATIONS WHERE THE RAKE IS POSITIVE (I.E., Y<Z OR Y′<Z′) THE EQUATIONS
FROM FRONT END TO REAR END). IF THE FRONT END OF THE FRAME IS HIGHER THAN FOR DETERMINING FRAME HEIGHT AT THE RAIL ENDS ARE:
THE REAR END (I.E., Y>Z OR Y′>Z′) THEN THE TRUCK IS SAID TO HAVE A NEGATIVE
RAKE. IN THIS SITUATION, THE EQUATIONS FOR DETERMINING THE FRAME HEIGHT AT
THE RAIL ENDS ARE:

Frame Height @ Front End of Rail: Frame Height @ Front End of Rail:
(FOR UNLOADED CONDITION) (FOR UNLOADED CONDITION)
Y–Z Z–Y
FG = Y +  --------------- x BA FG = Y –  --------------- x BA
 WB   WB 
(FOR LOADED CONDITION) (FOR LOADED CONDITION)
Y′ – Z′ Z′ – Y′
FG′ = Y′ +  ------------------- x BA FG′ = Y′ –  ------------------- x BA
 WB   WB 

Frame Height @ Rear End of Rail: Frame Height @ Rear End of Rail:
(FOR UNLOADED CONDITION) (FOR UNLOADED CONDITION)
RG = Z – Y –Z
--------------- x AF
Z–Y
RG = Z +  --------------- x AF
 WB   WB 
(FOR LOADED CONDITION) (FOR LOADED CONDITION)
Y′ – Z′ Z′ – Y′
RG′ = Z′ –  ------------------- x AF RG′ = Z′ +  ------------------- x AF
 WB   WB 

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-63


FRAME HEIGHT CALCULATION – AT FRONT AND REAR RAIL ENDS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-64
FRONT BUMPER AND TOW HOOKS - 4300 AND LP
FRONT BUMPER AND TOW HOOKS

4300 and LP
Front Aero Bumper (01LLD) and Front Tow Hooks (01570)

2.8 (70)
2.8 (70)

51.6
(1311)

CHASSIS
7.5 2.8
(190) (70) 2.8 9.3
(70) (235)

RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE 46.3


(1176)
STD AERO
1.5 (38) 29.6 BUMPER 01LLD
1.5 (38)
(751)

1.5 (38) 2.5 (62)

20.5
3.8 3.8
(97) (521
(97) 10.9
10.9 (278)
(278)

2.6 2.6
(67) (67)

15.0 FRONT SPRING EYE


(381)
01_0076
FRONT BUMPER AND TOW HOOKS

4400
Front Aero Bumper (01LLD) and Front Tow Hooks (01570)

2.8 2.8 58.6


(70) (70) (1487)
CHASSIS

7.5 2.8 2.8 7.5


(190) (70) (70) (190) 46.3
RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE (1176)
29.6
(751) STD AERO
BUMPER 01LLD
1.5 1.5
(38) (38)
1.5 1.5
(38) (38)
20.5
(521)
3.8 3.8
(97) (97)
10.9 10.9
(278) (278)

2.6 FRONT XMBR 2.6


(67) (67)

FRONT SPRING EYE


15
(381)
01_0237

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-65


FRONT BUMPER AND TOW HOOKS - 4400
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-66
FRONT BUMPER, TOW HOOKS AND EXTENSIONS - 4300 AND LP
Front Bumper, Tow Hooks and Extensions

4300 and LP
Swept Back Front Bumper (01LLA), Front Tow Hook (01570) and Bolt-On Front Frame Extension (01WDR)

30.7
(779)
1.7 (42) 4.2 (107) 25.9
4.2 (659) 20.7
(526)
2.8 (105
(70)

3.3 (83)
2.8 (70)
2.2 (57)
43.9
(1115)
CHASSIS
30.4 2.8
(772) (70) 2.8 30.4
(70) (772)

RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE


47.4
(104) 34.6
(879)
.9 8.4 1.4 1.0 30.3 30 Degree Swept Back
(22) (212) (34) (25) (770) Bumper 01LLA

10.4
(265)
6.9 6.9
(175) (175)
3.8 (97)

35.3 FRONT SPRING EYE


(89.6)

01_0077
FRONT BUMPER, TOW HOOKS AND EXTENSIONS

4400
Swept Back Front Bumper (01LLA), Front Tow Hook (01570) and Bolt-On Front Frame Extension (01WDR)

20.7
(526)

30.7 30.7
1.7 4.2 (779) 4.2 (779)
(42) (107)
2.8 2.8 (105)
(70) (70)
2.2 (57) 42.5 CHASSIS
(1081)
3.3 (83)

47.4
2.8 2.8 30.4 (1204)
30.4
(772) (70) (70) (772)

RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE


35.3
20.7 (896)
(526)
30 DEGREE SWEPT BACK
BUMPER 01LLA
10.4
0.9 8.4 8.4 0.9 (265)
(22) (212) (212) (22)

6.9 6.9
(175) (175)

FRONT CROSSMEMBER

3.8
(97)

35.3 FRONT SPRING EYE


(896)

01_0238

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-67


FRONT BUMPER, TOW HOOKS AND EXTENSIONS - 4400
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-68
TIRE CARRIER - ALL MODELS
TIRE CARRIER

All Models

CL
REAR AXLE
A 31.5
(800)

20.9
4.6 (530)
(116) 14.6
15.9 (371)
(404)

37.6 47.0
(954) (1194)
01_0078

Dimensions From Rear Axle Centerline


Suspension A
All 4x2 40.6" (1030)
6x4 52" Air/4-Spring 59.8" (1520)
6x4 55", 60" Air 63.9" (1622)
OVERHANG LIMITS FOR REFUSE /RECYCLER BODIES

LP
Dump, and other similar pivoting bodies, impose a great deal of stress on the frame rails in the rear suspension area. The body installer has the
responsibility for determining the pivot pin load and for establishing operating guidelines to prevent exceeding this load.
The limits shown in this chart are for equal loading on both sidemembers, i.e. the center of gravity of the raised body is ideally centered and the
chassis is on solid, level ground. If the center of gravity is laterally offset due either to uneven loading, uneven ground, or both, the bending moment
on one of the rails could increase substantially. For this reason the body installer should derate the overhang limits to account for the lateral shift if
either of these factors apply.

Overhang Limit, “L” (in.)


“P” (-lb) LP – 80,000 PSI
Steel Leaf Springs Air Suspension
6,000 95 90
8,000 82 71
10,000 68 61
12,000 59 53
14,000 52 47

01_0079

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-69


OVERHANG LIMITS FOR REFUSE /RECYCLER BODIES - LP
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRAMES • 01 FEBRUARY 2015 — 01-70
OVERHANG LIMITS FOR REFUSE /RECYCLER BODIES - LP
FRONT AXLES
ALL MODELS
Front Axle Tread

= DISTANCE (WIDTH) BETWEEN VERTICAL CENTERLINES OF SINGLE TIRES AT


TREAD OPPOSITE ENDS OF AXLE, OR BETWEEN VERTICAL CENTERLINES OF DUAL
SPACING (D.S.) AT OPPOSITE ENDS OF AXLE.
= OVERALL WIDTH OF NEW TIRE AT TOP OF TIRE UNDER MAXIMUM LOAD,
TIRE SECT
INCLUDING 24-HOUR INFLATION GROWTH, AND INCLUDING PROTECTIVE SIDE RIBS,
(Tire Section)
BARS AND DECORATIONS RECOMMENDED BY TIRE MANUFACTURER.

TREAD + TIRE SECT = OVERALL WIDTH OF AXLE, RIM, AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AT TOP OF TIRES UNDER
(Tread plus Tire Section) MAXIMUM LOAD RECOMMENDED BY TIRE MANUFACTURER.

= DISTANCE (WIDTH) BETWEEN NEAR SIDES OF TIRES AT OPPOSITE ENDS OF AXLE


TREAD - TIRE SECT
AT TOP OF TIRE UNDER MAXIMUM LOAD RECOMMENDED BY THE TIRE
(Tread minus Tire Section)
MANUFACTURER.

SLR = DISTANCE FROM GROUND TO CENTERLINE OF HUB WHEN TIRES ARE CORRECTLY
(Static Loaded Radius) INFLATED AND UNDER MAXIMUM LOAD RECOMMENDED BY TIRE MANUFACTURER.

02_0004

The chart shown here lists tread information for various wheel/axle combinations. Tread dimensions are not dependent on tire size. Other
dimensions explained here are related to tread and require tire dimensions. Please contact your tire supplier (or consult the Component Book, PDB-
70000) for tire dimensions.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRONT AXLES • 02 FEBRUARY 2015 — 02-1


ALL MODELS - FRONT AXLE TREAD
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRONT AXLES • 02 FEBRUARY 2015 — 02-2
FRONT AXLE TREAD - ALL MODELS WHERE APPLICABLE
FRONT AXLE TREAD

All Models Where Applicable

Wheel/Rim Axle Code (Front Non-Driving)


02AEZ, 02AGB, 02AGG, 02AGC, 02AGE, 02AHD,
02AGM, 02AHY, 02AHZ, 02AEM 02ATK 02ARV, 02ARW, 02ARX,
Type Size Material 02AJA, 02ATE, 02AYD, 02ATL 02ASM, 02ATD, 02ATG
Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic
Air Brake Air Brake Air Brake Air Brake
Brake Brake Brake Brake
19.5 x 6.75 Steel – – – 83.60 – 84.60 – –
Steel (10-285) – – – – – – – –
19.5 x 7.50 Aluminum (8-275) – – – 83.01 – 82.01 – –
Aluminum (10-285) – – – – – – – –
22.5 x 7.50 Steel – 79.73 – 80.44 – 79.44 – 77.23
Disc Steel – 79.41 – 80.12 – 79.12 – 76.91
22.5 x 8.25
Aluminum – 80.31 – 81.01 – 80.01 – 82.81
Steel (5.25 offset) – – – – – – – –
22.5 x 9.00 Steel (7.00 offset) – – – – – – – –
Aluminum – – – – – – – –
22.5 x 12.25 Steel – – – – – – – –
FRONT SUSPENSIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKETS

MODELS 4300 AND LP


Left Side Rails

28.77 31.22
(731) (793)

1.96 1.37
(35) 1.50
(50) (38)
3.96
(100)

FRONT
2.56 AXLE
FWD (65)

7.55 15.34 27.14 7.40


(192) (390) (689) (188)

5.9
3.39 4.65 2.36 (150)
(118) 2.70
(86) 4.29 (60) (69)
(109)

7.05 1.73
(179) 5.0 (44)
(127)
03_0004

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRONT SUSPENSIONS • 03 FEBRUARY 2015 — 03-1


FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKETS - MODELS 4300 AND LP
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRONT SUSPENSIONS • 03 FEBRUARY 2015 — 03-2
FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKETS - MODEL 4400
FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKETS

MODEL 4400
Left Side Rails

durastar_4400_front_suspension_bracket
FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKETS

ALL MODELS
Right Side Rails

31.19 26.65
(792) (677)

1.37 3.96
1.50 (35) (100)
8.85
(38) (225)

C
L
FRONT AXLE FWD
2.6
27.14 (66)
(689) 3.10
(79)

7.4
2.36 2.52 8.64
(188)
(60) (64) (219)
4.3 10.21
(109) (259)

2.70 4.65 13.67


(69) 1.73 (118) (347)
5.9 (44)
(150) 5.0
(127) 28
(711)

03_0005

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRONT SUSPENSIONS • 03 FEBRUARY 2015 — 03-3


FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKETS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FRONT SUSPENSIONS • 03 FEBRUARY 2015 — 03-4
FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKETS - ALL MODELS
BRAKES
ALL MODELS
Air Brake Modifications
Certification Procedures For DOT FMVSS-121
The Federal Department of Transportation's Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 121 required that virtually all trucks equipped with air brakes and
manufactured on or after March 1, 1975 must comply with a comprehensive set of design and performance parameters concerning the air brakes
and related systems.
Of the many requirements of FMVSS 121, two are of primary concern between the truck manufacturer and the body and allied equipment
manufacturer. The first concern is the center of gravity location on a truck used for compliance testing and the second involves the tubing and air
flow design of the brake system.
Cautions - FMVSS-121 Air Brake System Modifications

CAUTION: If wheelbase alterations are made to International vehicles with FMVSS-121 brakes:
• DO NOT make alterations to air lines with hose, piping or fittings of sizes other than those currently in use on the truck.
• DO NOT allow sharp bends or other constrictions in hosing.
• DO NOT exceed the minimum or maximum wheelbase available from the factory for that model after lengthening or shortening
the wheelbase. For wheelbases longer or shorter than those available from the factory, International will provide verbal opinion
(through contacting your local International dealer). International will be available to provide certification testing and
documentation of compliance or non-compliance with FMVSS-121 for the specific situation at an additional cost.

CAUTION: Air reservoirs may be relocated providing these guidelines are followed:
• DO NOT make alterations to air lines with hose, piping or fittings of sizes other than those currently in use on the truck.
• DO NOT allow sharp bends or other constrictions in hosing.
• DO NOT alter brake line to port location.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-1


ALL MODELS - AIR BRAKE MODIFICATIONS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-2
ALL MODELS - AIR BRAKE MODIFICATIONS

CAUTION: Air-operated auxiliary attachments may be added to International FMVSS-121 vehicles if you:
• DO NOT use air tap locations other than those shown on these drawings for these models.
• PRESSURE PROTECTION VALVES ARE REQUIRED WHERE SHOWN AND SHOULD BE MOUNTED WITH THE VENT PORT
DOWNWARD. ALL NEW PARTS ARE AVAILABLE FROM INTERNATIONAL TRUCK DEALERS. Since the FVMSS-121 has very
specific criteria for the time allowed for air to reach and release the brakes, it is obvious that the tubing design is very critical and
that the allowable sources for air tap must necessarily be restricted. Consult FMVSS-121 for criteria for time allowed for apply
and release of brakes.
ALL MODELS
Brake Restrictions
Safety Measures
Should it be necessary to modify the braking system, for example in connection with a wheelbase alteration, the following must always be observed:
• Make sure that the brake circuits are not altered. Before any part of the braking system is dismantled, mark the brake pipes and connections
concerned, or make a sketch showing the original routing.
• Avoid joints, preferably change the entire brake pipe.
• Preferably, use bent brake pipes instead of elbow unions so as not to affect the brake application/release times.
• Install the brake pipes in positions where they are protected against damage and heat.
• Install the air tanks so that the drain valves still function well and are easy to reach.

CAUTION: When a brake pipe is replaced or jointed, use only genuine International parts of the correct type.
NOTE: On trucks with ABS brakes, the sensor cable must not be jointed. If necessary, it must be completely replaced.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-3


ALL MODELS - AIR BRAKE MODIFICATIONS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-4
FULL POWER HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC - WITH TRUCK BRAKE SYSTEM CODE 04085
FULL POWER HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

with Truck Brake System Code 04085

04_0081
ANTILOCK AIR BRAKE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

with Truck Brake System Code 04091

Service Brake ABS C ontrol


ABS W heel Park Brake Control Valve Module
Speed Sensor (4) C ham ber
Air
Pressure
Gauge
Air
Pressure
Gauge

ABS M odulator Low Pressure Low Pressure Switch ABS M odulator Valve
Valve Switch
Secondary Stop
Light Sw itch Quick Quick
R elay
Prim ary Stop R elease R elease
Valve
Light Sw itch Valve
Valve
Foot Valve
ABS M odulator E-8P
Valve Spring Brake
M odulator Valve ABS M odulator Valve

Service Brake C ham ber


Spring Brake C ham ber
Service Brake C ham ber

Air Accessory Solenoid M odule


Air D ryer

Air supply for various air


controlled accessories .
C om pressor
C heck Valve Pressure Protection Valve
Governor
P rim a ry T a n k Extra port for non-solenoid air
accessories such as air
suspensions , transm issions , etc.
D rain Valve
Safety Valve

Key:
W et Tank S e co n d a ry T a n k Secondary Circuit
Primary Circuit
Parking Brake Circuit
Electrical Circuits
04_0102

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-5


ANTILOCK AIR BRAKE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC - WITH TRUCK BRAKE SYSTEM CODE 04091
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-6
ROUTING GUIDELINES - ALL MODELS
ROUTING GUIDELINES

All Models
If modifications are made to International vehicles with the addition or re-routing of tubing the following guidelines found in the Federal Motor Carrier
Safety Regulations Pocketbook, section 393.45, should be followed:
• Be designed and constructed in a manner that insures proper, adequate, and continued functioning of the tubing or hose.
• Be installed in a manner that insures proper continued functioning of the tubing or hose.
• Be long and flexible enough to accommodate without damage all normal motions of the part to which it is attached.
• Be suitably secured against chafing, kinking, or other mechanical damage.
• Be installed in a manner that prevents it from contacting the vehicle's exhaust system or any other source of high temperatures.
AIR-OPERATED AUXILIARY ATTACHMENTS

ALL MODELS
• The primary air reservoir has a dedicated port for a two-port pressure protection valve (PPV). If no air-operated features are ordered on the
vehicle, then this port is plugged from the factory. A PPV can be ordered from an International dealer if a PPV is needed.
• The PPV will come installed from the factory if an air suspension or other air-operated device is ordered (i.e., fifth wheel slide, air suspension
dump, etc.). Depending on vehicle ordered features; one port may be open. If this is the case, then unplug that port and use the port.
• If all of the ports on the PPV are utilized, then a Quality Connect tee should be installed into the one of the used ports. The recommended tee
- 3/8-inch x 3/8-inch x 3/8-inch stem (International part number 2024458C1) – can be ordered from an International dealer.

04_0005 04_0006

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-7


AIR-OPERATED AUXILIARY ATTACHMENTS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-8
TUBE FITTING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - ALL MODELS
TUBE FITTING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

All Models
The majority of tube fitting connections in the air braked chassis utilize a Quality Connect fitting (fitting integral to an air brake component or plastic
fitting) or an PTC fitting (fitting threaded into an air brake component). Both of these fitting types are comprised of a collet which bites into the tube
to hold it firmly in place and a fitting O-ring which seals the tube to the valve, manifold or tee body to prevent leakage. To aid in service, a kit is
available with tools for each port and tube size used by International.
To assure standardization of tubing used on International vehicles, the following table illustrates tubing color, abbreviations and where that color is
used.

Color Abbreviation Where Used


MV-3, PPDC Exhaust
Air Seat
Black BK Air Horn
Air Dryer to Wet Tank
Wet tank to Governor

Blue BL Trailer Service, 1st Pusher Delivery

Brown BN Air Suspension system, 2nd Pusher Delivery

Green GN Primary Brake system

Orange OR Secondary Brake system

Purple PL 1st Tag Delivery

Red RD Trailer emergency

PDL control, 2nd Pusher Supply


Silver SIL
Governor to Dryer

Locking differential, 1st Pusher Supply


Tan TN Traction differential
Two-speed axle

White WH Solenoid Pack Supply Load Sensing Gauge, 1st Tag Supply

Yellow YL Spring Brake System, Cab Air Suspension


REMOVAL AND INSERTION PROCEDURES FOR TUBING IN QC OR PTC FITTINGS

All Models
WARNING: Do not attempt to disassemble tubing from fittings with air pressure in the system. Failure to drain system
of air pressure before removing components may cause personal injury or death.

Removal of Tube from Fitting


• Use the tube release tool (see graphic 1 below) to remove the tube.
• Push down on the release tool, then pull on the tube. Pushing the tool depresses the fitting collet, allowing it to release the tube. Sometimes
the brass tube support will be pulled out of the fitting when the tube is removed. Be sure to reinstall a tube support when installing the tube.
Preparation of Tube for Installation
• Inspect the tube end for external scratches, burrs, or cracks. If it is damaged, trim the damaged portion off at an insertion depth mark (see
graphic 2 below) or replace the tube. DO NOT reuse a damaged end.

IMPORTANT: Use the tube cutter (supplied in the tool kit) to ensure that the cut is square within 15° to help prevent leakage. Do not use a dull or heavy cutting tool such as side
cutters, pocket knife or hack saw which could collapse (flatten) the tube or create O-ring damaging burrs. Do not use the tube cutter to cut anything other than nylon
air line tubing. Replace the blade or cutter if the cutting edge becomes dull.

Installing Tube Into The Fitting


• Lubricate the tube end and install it to the correct insertion depth (see graphic 3 below). Install the tube by pushing it straight into the fitting.
The insertion depth mark should be flush with the face of the fitting (see graphic 3 below). Gently tug on the tube to make sure it is secured in
the fitting.
• Test to make sure the assembly is free from leaks using a soap solution and clean, dry air at system pressure. When performing a bubble test,
leakage should not exceed a soap bubble of 1/2-inch (12 mm) in 3 seconds with system air pressure of 100 to 130 psi. If a leak exceeding the
above specification is still present, remove and replace the valve, manifold or tee.

04_007 04_008 04_009


1– Remove Tube 2 – Prepare for Installation 3 – Install Tube into the Fitting

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-9


REMOVAL AND INSERTION PROCEDURES FOR TUBING IN QC OR PTC FITTINGS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-10
AIR BRAKE TUBING - ALL MODELS
AIR BRAKE TUBING

All Models
Front Section

1/2" ORANGE
SUPPLY TO
MODULATOR VALVE

1/2" ORANGE
SUPPLY FROM
1/2" ORANGE FOOT VALVE
SUPPLY TO TO FITTING
ANCHOR FITTING

3/8" ORANGE
TO SPRING BRAKE
MODULATOR VALVE
1/2" ORANGE
SUPPLY TO
MODULATOR VALVE

1/2" ORANGE
SUPPLY TO
ANCHOR FITTING

04_0010
AIR BRAKE TUBING

All Models
Rear Section – Truck Brakes

5/8" GREEN
DELIVERY FROM RELAY
VALVE TO MODULATOR VALVE
3/8" GREEN
SIGNAL LINE FROM
FOOT VALVE TO
RELAY VALVE
5/8" GREEN (4x2); 3/4" GREEN (6x4)
SUPPLY FROM PRIMARY AIR
TANK TO RELAY VALVE

3/8” YELLOW
DELIVERY FROM
SPRING BRAKE
3/8" YELLOW CONTROL VALVE
DELIVERY FROM
INVERSION VALVE
TO QRV

3/8" GREEN
SIGNAL LINE FROM
INVERSION VALVE
TO RELAY VALVE
3/8" ORANGE
SIGNAL LINE FROM
X FITTING TO
INVERSION VALVE
5/8" GREEN
DELIVERY FROM
RELAY VALVE TO TO BOTTOM PORT
MODULATOR VALVE OF RELAY VALVE
04_0012

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-11


AIR BRAKE TUBING - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-12
INSIDE CAB & FOOT VALVE PLUMBING - ALL MODELS
INSIDE CAB & FOOT VALVE PLUMBING

All Models

For connections not shown,


please refer to the appropriate
schematic in the CT-400
General Information book.

3/8" Black
Exhaust from Spring Brake Control Valve

3/8" Orange
Supply to Spring Brake Control Valve 3/8" Green
Supply to Spring Brake Control Valve

Dash Panel

5/8" Orange
3/8" Yellow
Supply from Secondary Air Tank to Foot Valve
Delivery from Spring Brake Control Valve

5/8" Green
Supply from Primary Air Tank to Foot Valve
04_0013
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT PLUMBING

All Models

High pressure brake


accumulators (see ISIS
Service Manual prior to
service) 1/4" tube to left front brake

5/8" tube to master


cylinder reservoir

1/4" tube to right front brake

1/4" tube to
left rear brake
Back of cab crossmember
1/4" tube to
master cylinder
1/4" tube to (secondary)
right rear
brake
1/4" tube to master
cylinder (primary)

04_0014

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-13


HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT PLUMBING - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-14
PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY WITH HYDRAULIC BRAKES - ALL MODELS
PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY WITH HYDRAULIC BRAKES

All Models

PARK
BRAKE

PARK
BRAKE
LEVER

04_0015

With hydraulic brakes, the park brake assembly is attached to the rear axle. It is mechanically actuated through the use of a three-section cable.
Due to the construction of the cables, it is not possible to alter the length.
AIR ABS ECU (ELECTRICAL CONTROL UNIT)

All Models

INSTRUMENT PANEL
PASSENGER SIDE

ECU

04_0016

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-15


AIR ABS ECU (ELECTRICAL CONTROL UNIT) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-16
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
With Hydraulic Brakes and Air Effects Right (504030) and Left (504616) Side Mounted

CREW EXT. REG.


CAB CAB CAB

17.91 (REF) 25.98 (REF)


(660)
(455)

504616

8.68
(220)
8.68

504030

FWD
26.60 6.93
(676) (176)

10.87 (276)

8.62 DIA 26.46


(219) (672)
[Right Shown; Left Opposite]
04_0017
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
With Air Brakes Left (508003) Side Mounted Under Battery Box, Back of Cab

BACK OF BACK OF BACK OF


STD CAB EXT CAB CREW CAB
8.5" Tank 11" Tank
Key
Inch (Millimeter)
A 4.1 (103.8) 1.6 (41.7)
FRONT B 21.8 (553.7) 24.2 (614.7)
+ + + C 3.8 (96.7) 23.9 (606.6)

A D 12.5 (318.3) 14.9 (379.2)


E 5.6 (142.3) 5.4 (137.4)
F 40.5 (1029.3) 41.3 (1048.3)

25.4 B
(644.1 )

8.2
(207.8)
35.4
(899.2 )

C
D

508003

04_0018

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-17


AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-18
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
With Air Brakes Left (504602) Side Mounted Under Battery Box, Under Cab

BACK OF BACK OF BACK OF


STD CAB EXT CAB CREW CAB 8.5" Tank 11" Tank
Key
Inch (Millimeter)
A 4.1 (103.8) 1.6 (41.7)
B 21.8 (553.7) 24.2 (614.7)
C 4.0 (102.4) 3.8 (96.7)
FRONT
+ + + D 12.5 (318.3) 14.9 (379.2)
E 3.5 (89.9) 2.3 (59.0)
A

25.4 B
(644.1)

7.4
34.7 (188.8)
(880.2)
38.2
(969.9)

C
D

504602
04_0019
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models LP and 4x2


With Air Brakes Left (504615) Side Mounted, Back of Cab, With 19.5" Diameter Wheels

REG. EXT. CREW


CAB CAB CAB
25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF)
(660) (455)

25.33
FWD (643)

504615
5.96 33.83
(151) (859)

8.62 DIA 6.12 8.34


(219) (155) (212)
04_0020

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-19


AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS LP AND 4X2
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-20
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
With Air Brakes Right (504603) Side Mounted Under Battery Box, Under Cab

38.2
(970.8)
34.7 8.5" Tank 11" Tank
(880.2) Key
Inch (Millimeter)
7.4
(188.8) A 4.1 (103.8) 1.6 (41.7)
E B 21.8 (553.7) 24.2 (616.7)
C 4.0 (102.4) 3.8 (96.7)
23.9 B D 12.5 (318.3) 14.9 (379.2)
(606.6)
E 3.5 (89.9) 2.3 (59.0)
A

FRONT + + +

BACK OF BACK OF BACK OF


STD CAB EXT CAB CREW CAB

+ + +

C
D

504603
04_0021
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504090), not with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504090_nw_04wrp

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-21


AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-22
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504090), with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504090_w_04wrp
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504091), not with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504091_nw_04wrp

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-23


AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-24
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504091), with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504091_w_04wrp
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504092), not with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504092_nw_04wrp

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-25


AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-26
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504092), with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504092_w_04wrp
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504093), not with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504093_nw_04wrp

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-27


AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-28
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04WZJ) with Air Tank Mounting (504093), with Drain Valve (04WRP)

durastar_504093_w_04wrp
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04VJE with Battery Box 08XDU)

durastar_04vje_with_08xdu

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-29


AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-30
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
AIR TANK LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Air Tank Location (04VJE with Battery Boxes 08VUT, 08VUU, or 508004)

durastar_04vje_with_08vut_08vuu_508004
AIR DRYER LOCATION

All Models
04EBD, 04EBS, 04EBT

9.58 12.00 12.11 8.46


(243) (305) (308) (215)

8.40 12.74 11.79


(213) 12.65 (299)
(324)
(321)
04EBT 04EBS 04EBT 04EBD

13.19 14.21 13.50 12.50


(335) (361) (343) (318)

LOCATION CODES 504393 504395 504395 504395


04VBC 504396 504396 504396

BATTERY BOX MOUNTED FRAME MOUNTED

04_0022

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-31


AIR DRYER LOCATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-32
AIR DRYER LOCATION - ALL MODELS
AIR DRYER LOCATION

All Models
Air Dryer 04EBD with Location 504396; Mounted Left Side Inside Rail, Back of Regular Cab

BACK OF BACK OF
BACK OF
STD CAB STD CAB
STD CAB
26.00 18.00
(660.40 ) (457.20 )

FWD
+ + +

14.5
(368.5 )

+ + +

04EBD
504396
4.4
(111.5)
04_0023
AIR DRYER LOCATION

All Models
Air Dryer 04EBS with Location 504395; Mounted Right Side Inside Rail, Back of Standard Cab

REG. EXT. CREW


CAB CAB CAB

25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF)


(660) (455)

FWD

2.31
(59)
04EBS
504395

4.72
(120)
04_0024

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-33


AIR DRYER LOCATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-34
AIR DRYER LOCATION - ALL MODELS
AIR DRYER LOCATION

All Models
Air Dryer 04EBS with Location 504396; Mounted Left Side Inside Rail, Back of Standard Cab

CREW EXT. REG.


CAB CAB CAB

(REF) 17.91 25.98 (REF)


(455) (660)

FWD
14.78
(375)
04EBS
504396

4.72
(120)
04_0025
AIR DRYER LOCATION

All Models
Air Dryer 04EBT with Locations 04VBC or 504393; Mounted Left Side, Back of Battery Box, Under Cab

REG. EXT. CREW


CAB CAB CAB

(REF) 17.91 (REF)


25.98
(455)
(660)

FWD .84
(21)
8.48
04EBT
(215) 504393
04VBC

4.30
(109)
04_0026

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-35


AIR DRYER LOCATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER BRAKES • 04 FEBRUARY 2015 — 04-36
AIR DRYER LOCATION - ALL MODELS
STEERING
STEERING GEAR LOCATION/DIMENSIONS
Models 4300 4x2 and LP
Code 05PRG

3.6
(90.7)
7.6
(193.8)

16.7
3.9 (424.8)
(100.2)

6.0
(152.8)

11.5
(291.7)

R 10.2
(260.4)

1.4
(34.9)
18.8
(476.4)
05_0006

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER STEERING • 05 FEBRUARY 2015 — 05-1


STEERING GEAR LOCATION/DIMENSIONS - MODELS 4300 4X2 AND LP
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER STEERING • 05 FEBRUARY 2015 — 05-2
STEERING GEAR LOCATION/DIMENSIONS - MODEL 4300
STEERING GEAR LOCATION /DIMENSIONS

Model 4300
Code 05PRR

4.0
(101.6)
8.8
(224.6)

16.7
3.6 (424.9)
(91.4)

6.1
(154.8)

8.6
(217.7)

R 10.2
(260.4)
1.3
(31.9)
18.9
(478.8)
05_0007
STEERING GEAR LOCATION /DIMENSIONS

All Models
Code 05PSA

4.0
(101.6)
8.8
(224.6)

16.7
(424.9)
3.6
(91.4)

6.1
(154.8)

8.6
(217.7)

R 10.2
(260.4)
1.3
(31.9) 18.9
(479.2)
05_0008

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER STEERING • 05 FEBRUARY 2015 — 05-3


STEERING GEAR LOCATION/DIMENSIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER STEERING • 05 FEBRUARY 2015 — 05-4
STEERING GEAR LOCATION/DIMENSIONS - MODELS 4400 4X2 AND LP
STEERING GEAR LOCATION /DIMENSIONS

Models 4400 4x2 and LP


Code 05PRU

13.1
(332.5)

1.3 12.2
(33.4) (309.8)

3.2
(81.5)

13.4 12.7
(339.2) (322.7)

4.0
(101.1)
17.1
(433.9)
05PRU
STEERING GEAR LOCATION /DIMENSIONS

Models 4300 and 4400


Code 05PRV

12.2
(309.6)
1.7
(42.2)

3.7
(92.7)

12.9 12.4
(328.5) (315)

3.4
(86.9)
16.0
(407.6)
05PRV

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER STEERING • 05 FEBRUARY 2015 — 05-5


STEERING GEAR LOCATION/DIMENSIONS - MODELS 4300 AND 4400
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER STEERING • 05 FEBRUARY 2015 — 05-6
STEERING GEAR LOCATION/DIMENSIONS - MODELS 4300 AND 4400
STEERING GEAR LOCATION /DIMENSIONS

Models 4300 and 4400


Code 05PSM

12.7
(321.5)
0.6
(15.3)

3.8
(97.6)

13.0 12.3
(330.1) (312)

3.6
(90.6)
16.2
(412.2)
05PSM
EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR)
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS
All Models
Navistar, Inc. has a responsibility to supply, install and ensure that the engines and aftertreatment emission control devices comply with the
certification requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the California Air Resources Board (ARB). The aftertreatment
devices may include a combination of particulate filters, catalysts, catalytic converter, and temperature and pressure sensors, along with other
components.

Proper long-term operation of these components requires controlling exhaust stream temperatures and the exhaust flow pattern throughout the
system. This controls the required location of the components as well as the insulation of the various parts of the system.

For this reason, application guidelines for aftertreatment and tailpipe installations are much more complex and restrictive than in the past. Navistar,
Inc. will ensure correct factory installation of aftertreatment devices to assure compliance with the certification requirements.

Modified systems could damage the engine, aftertreatment system and other truck systems and void the warranty coverage. In that regard, Navistar,
Inc. will make it a policy to procure and correctly install the appropriate aftertreatment devices pursuant to applicable specifications and application
guidelines. That brings with it the benefit of certified systems that will be fully covered under warranty provided the vehicle is properly maintained and
not modified beyond the extent allowed by the Body Builder book.

The following guidelines are meant to clarify the allowable modifications for aftertreatment systems installed on US 2010 EPA compliant vehicles.
Please consult applicable federal, state and local laws and requirements in conjunction with this document to ensure compliance to those
requirements. Also, refer to applicable vehicle warranty information before performing any modifications to the vehicle. Non-compliance to the
requirements of the warranty may nullify it in its entirety.
• Where possible, trucks first and foremost should be ordered directly from the factory that meets the body installation requirements so that
the minimum, or no modification of the exhaust system will be required.
• Where this is not possible, if another exhaust configuration is available from the factory that closer meets the need of the body installation,
it is permissible to completely replace one exhaust configuration with the better choice exhaust system provided that would have been
available with the same engine, and the clearance guidelines in this reference are followed.
• Exhaust Gas Temperatures may be as high as 800o C during vehicle operation. Precautions should be taken to ensure that materials used
in the vicinity of the exhaust system and exhaust gas stream can withstand these temperatures or are safely shielded.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-1
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-2
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
MEETING LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
It is the responsibility of the person performing modifications to the vehicle to ensure that the vehicle, in its final configuration, conforms
to any applicable law regarding emission control, noise level and applicable safety standards.
TURBO PIPE
The function of the Turbo Pipe is to deliver exhaust gases from the engine to the Aftertreatment Module so that temperature losses are minimized
and so that the flow pattern of the exhaust gases maximizes the efficiency of the Aftertreatment Module. In addition for 2010, the I6 turbo pipe
includes a Pre-Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (PDOC). This functions to increase heat in the turbo pipe to the Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) and must
remain as installed from the factory. Any modifications to this piping without written approval of Navistar, Inc. may significantly reduce the
performance of the Aftertreatment Module and VOID any applicable warranty.

All Modifications to Turbo Pipe Location, Geometry and Materials MUST be approved by Navistar, Inc.

If so equipped, heat shields and protective wraps must be maintained on the vehicle to ensure the proper performance of the Aftertreatment Module
and for the protection of the installed truck systems.

Never mount any additional harnesses or other equipment to the Aftertreatment Module.

AFTERTREATMENT MODULE
The function of the Aftertreatment Module is to catch soot exhausted from the engine and convert it to ash. It is critical that the temperature and
pressure sensors’ wiring remain intact for the Aftertreatment Module to perform as designed. It is critical to maintain the location of the
Aftertreatment Module as installed from the factory to ensure its proper operation. Any modifications to the Aftertreatment Module without the written
approval of Navistar, Inc. may significantly reduce the performance of the Aftertreatment Module and VOID any applicable warranty.

All Modifications to Aftertreatment Module Location, Geometry, Materials, Wiring, Sensors or Tubing MUST be approved by Navistar, Inc.

If so equipped, heat shields and protective wraps must be maintained on the vehicle to ensure the proper performance of the Aftertreatment Module
and for the protection of the installed truck systems.

Never mount any additional harnesses or other equipment to the Aftertreatment Module.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICE
The function of the Temperature Control Device (if so equipped) is to reduce the exit exhaust gas temperature emitted from the Aftertreatment Device.
This device has been specifically designed to draw in cooler air to mix with the hotter exhaust gases. It is critical that the openings in the device that
draw in cooler air remain unblocked of debris or other equipment. This device is critical to ensure that the emitted temperatures of the exhaust are
minimized. Any modifications to the Temperature Control Device without the written approval of Navistar, Inc. may significantly reduce the efficiency of
the Temperature Control Device and significantly increase the emitted gas temperatures, and VOID any applicable warranty.

If so equipped, any installed Temperature Control Device MUST remain as part of the exhaust piping.

Changes to the location of the Temperature Control Device relative to the Aftertreatment Module must meet federal emissions, noise and safety
requirements. The responsibility for demonstrating that legal requirements are met when modifications have been made belongs to the modifier of the
system.

IF CHANGING THE LOCATION, SPECIAL ATTENTION MUST BE GIVEN TO MAINTAINING CLEARANCES AROUND THE EXHAUST PIPING, AS
WELL AS MAINTAINING THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY AND EXHAUST BACKPRESSURE OF THE SYSTEM. TABLES INCLUDED IN THIS
DOCUMENT PROVIDE RECOMMENDED CLEARANCES AND BACK PRESSURE ESTIMATION PROCEDURES.

EXHAUST PIPING MODIFICATIONS


Never modify the internal structure of the Turbo Pipe, Aftertreatment Module or the Temprature Control Device.

When lengthening or shortening tailpipes beyond the Aftertreatment Module, observe the following precautions:
1. Use the same size and material to extend or shorten the original pipe.
• Refer to Table 3.1 for proper material and sizing of pipes when extending or shortening tailpipe sections.
2. Adding additional extensions and bends will change internal exhaust gas pressure, which could result in damage to the Aftertreatment Module or
other engine components as well as a reduction in fuel economy.
• Use the worksheets provided to compute the change in backpressure of the modified exhaust piping. Ensure that the limits within the
worksheet are met to avoid performance issues and to maintain warranty of the engine and aftertreatment system.
3. Support additional piping using rubber mounts approved by International Truck and Engine Corporation (P/N 3533072C1 Isolator and P/N
3561980C1 Metal Sleeve). Add one additional support for every 4 linear feet of exhaust piping added, evenly spaced along the length of the chassis.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-3
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-4
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS

The exhaust piping should be routed so that the Temperature Control Device, if so equipped, is at the end of the exhaust pipe and oriented in the
same manner as received from the factory.

Route all piping with minimum clearances to other chassis components as shown in Table 3.2.

MOUNTING OF BODY EQUIPMENT


In comparison to vehicles produced prior to 2007, exhaust components surface temperatures and exhaust gas temperatures will typically be higher.

As a result of the increased temperatures, clearances to exhaust components will need to be increased compared to pre 2007 model year
clearances.

Typical installation clearances used for pre 2007 model year engines and exhaust systems should be increased by 40% to ensure that body
equipment is not damaged by the increased heat of these systems.

Do not mount any Body Equipment within 8 inches (200mm) of the exhaust pipe outlet to avoid damage from hot exhaust gases.

When modifying other chassis systems, maintain clearances shown in Table 3.2.
MaxxForce® DT/9

Pipe Material 409 Stainless Steel

Pipe Diameter 4”

Wall Thickness 0.065”

Minimum Clearance,
Component
mm (in)

Electric Harness 150 (6.0)

Electric Harness (w. heat guard) 100 (4.0)

Mechanical Cable 50 (2.0)

Fuel Tube, metal 150 (6.0)

Fuel Tube, rubber or plastic 150 (6.0)

Brake Tube, metal 100 (4.0)

Brake Tube, rubber or plastic 100 (4.0)

Tire 100 (4.0)

Fuel Tank 100 (4.0)

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-5
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-6
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
ALLOWABLE BACKPRESSURE TAILPIPE MODIFICATION WORKSHEET

Engine: MaxxForce® DT
Exhaust Configuration: Horizontal - Horizontal

A Qty of 90× elbows added ____ X 0.10 = ______________


B Qty of 60× elbows added ____ X 0.08 = ______________
C Qty of 45× elbows added ____ X 0.07 = ______________
D Qty of 30× elbows added ____ X 0.06 = ______________
E Feet of straight pipe added ____ X 0.02 = ______________
F Temperature Control Device Pressure 0.60
G Pipe Exit Pressure 0.28

Total Modification Backpressure (Add a-g)

Allowable Backpressure Limit 5.7


Is allowable Backpressure Limit GREATER than Total Modification Backpressure?
If YES, Modifications MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CAN be performed.
If NO, Modifications will NOT MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CANNOT be performed.
ALLOWABLE BACKPRESSURE TAILPIPE MODIFICATION WORKSHEET

Engine: MaxxForce® DT
Exhaust Configuration: Under Cab - Vertical

A Qty of 90× elbows added ____ X 0.10 = ______________


B Qty of 60× elbows added ____ X 0.08 = ______________
C Qty of 45× elbows added ____ X 0.07 = ______________
D Qty of 30× elbows added ____ X 0.06 = ______________
E Feet of straight pipe added ____ X 0.02 = ______________
F Temperature Control Device Pressure .60
G Pipe Exit Pressure 0.28

Total Modification Backpressure (Add a-g)

Allowable Backpressure Limit 5.2


Is allowable Backpressure Limit GREATER than Total Modification Backpressure?
If YES, Modifications MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CAN be performed.
If NO, Modifications will NOT MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CANNOT be performed.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-7
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-8
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
ALLOWABLE BACKPRESSURE TAILPIPE MODIFICATION WORKSHEET

Engine: MaxxForce® DT
Exhaust Configuration: Vertical - Vertical

A Qty of 90× elbows added ____ X 0.10 = ______________


B Qty of 60× elbows added ____ X 0.08 = ______________
C Qty of 45× elbows added ____ X 0.07 = ______________
D Qty of 30× elbows added ____ X 0.06 = ______________
E Feet of straight pipe added ____ X 0.02 = ______________
F Temperature Control Device Pressure .60
G Pipe Exit Pressure 0.28

Total Modification Backpressure (Add a-g)

Allowable Backpressure Limit 5.9


Is allowable Backpressure Limit GREATER than Total Modification Backpressure?
If YES, Modifications MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CAN be performed.
If NO, Modifications will NOT MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CANNOT be performed.
ALLOWABLE BACKPRESSURE TAILPIPE MODIFICATION WORKSHEET

Engine: MaxxForce® 9
Exhaust Configuration: Horizontal - Horizontal

A Qty of 90× elbows added ____ X 0.17 = ______________


B Qty of 60× elbows added ____ X 0.15 = ______________
C Qty of 45× elbows added ____ X 0.12 = ______________
D Qty of 30× elbows added ____ X 0.10 = ______________
E Feet of straight pipe added ____ X 0.03 = ______________
F Temperature Control Device Pressure 1.00
G Pipe Exit Pressure 0.50

Total Modification Backpressure (Add a-g)

Allowable Backpressure Limit 4.1


Is allowable Backpressure Limit GREATER than Total Modification Backpressure?
If YES, Modifications MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CAN be performed.
If NO, Modifications will NOT MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CANNOT be performed.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-9
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-10
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
ALLOWABLE BACKPRESSURE TAILPIPE MODIFICATION WORKSHEET

Engine: MaxxForce® 9
Exhaust Configuration: Under Cab - Vertical

A Qty of 90× elbows added ____ X 0.17 = ______________


B Qty of 60× elbows added ____ X 0.15 = ______________
C Qty of 45× elbows added ____ X 0.12 = ______________
D Qty of 30× elbows added ____ X 0.10 = ______________
E Feet of straight pipe added ____ X 0.03 = ______________
F Temperature Control Device Pressure 1.00
G Pipe Exit Pressure 0.50

Total Modification Backpressure (Add a-g)

Allowable Backpressure Limit 3.3


Is allowable Backpressure Limit GREATER than Total Modification Backpressure?
If YES, Modifications MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CAN be performed.
If NO, Modifications will NOT MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CANNOT be performed.
ALLOWABLE BACKPRESSURE TAILPIPE MODIFICATION WORKSHEET

Engine: MaxxForce® 9
Exhaust Configuration: Vertical - Vertical

A Qty of 90× elbows added ____ X 0.17 = ______________


B Qty of 60× elbows added ____ X 0.15 = ______________
C Qty of 45× elbows added ____ X 0.12 = ______________
D Qty of 30× elbows added ____ X 0.10 = ______________
E Feet of straight pipe added ____ X 0.03 = ______________
F Temperature Control Device Pressure 1.00
G Pipe Exit Pressure 0.50

Total Modification Backpressure (Add a-g)

Allowable Backpressure Limit 4.4


Is allowable Backpressure Limit GREATER than Total Modification Backpressure?
If YES, Modifications MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CAN be performed.
If NO, Modifications will NOT MEET Engine Manufacturer’s Guidelines and CANNOT be performed

• Use the backpressure values from the engine data sheets to compute the backpressure of the modified exhaust piping. Ensure that the
limits are within the data sheet when tested per the backpressure test procedure.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-11
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-12
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - LP AND 4x2 MODELS
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS
Horizontal Aftertreatment - LP and 4x2 Models
07BDA; Right Side Mounted

STD EXT CREW


CAB CAB CAB
1.1
(28)

8.7 To inside
(220) of frame rail

29.4
(747)
FWD 55.4
(1407)
73.3
(1862)

13.5
(343)

14.4 13.6 27.6 34.2


(367) (346) (701) (868)
96.7
(2455)
07_0005
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
6x4 Models
07BDA; Right Side Mounted

STD EXT CREW


CAB CAB CAB
1.1
(29)

(TO INSIDE OF RAIL)


8.7
(220)

FWD

29.2
(741)
55.2
(1401)
73.1
(1856)

13.5
(343)

12.6 34
(320) 23
(583) (863)

96.4
(2449)
07_0006

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-13
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 6x4 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-14
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 6x4 Models
07BDB; Right Side Mounted

STD
5.6 CAB
(142)

4.3
(108)
(TO INSIDE OF RAIL)

29.7
(755)

14.9
(380)

10.6 18.4
36.5
(270) (467)
(928)
71.8
(1824)
07_0015
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND LONG TAIL PIPE
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 6x4 Models
07BDB with 07WCA; Right Side Mounted

FRONT

BACK OF REGULAR CAB

10.6 6.2
(270) (157)

26.3 32.5
(668) (825)

14.3
(363)

14.8 14.1
17.3 (376) (357)
(440)
7.4 13.7
(188) (347)
70.2 16.1
(1784) (408)
07BDB_07WCA

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-15
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-16
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4X2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 6x4 Models
07BDC; Right Side Mounted

STD EXT CREW 26.3


CAB CAB CAB (668)
1.1
(29)

8.7 (TO INSIDE OF RAIL)


(220)

29.2
(741)
55.2
(1401)
73.1
(1856)

13.5
17.4
(343)
(443)
Note: Dimension A varies with
wheelbase in 200 mm increments
23.0
12.3 A
(583)
(313)

07_0007
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND LONG TAIL PIPE
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 6x4 Models
07BDC with 07WCA; Right Side Mounted

FRONT
BACK OF REGULAR CAB

10.6
(270)

6.0
26.3 (153)
(668)
32.5
(825)

12.9
(327)
14.8 13.6
17.3 (376)
(440) (345)

11.1 13.1
(282) 12.4 (332)
(314)
70.2
(1784)
07BDC_07WCA

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-17
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4X2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-18
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - ALL MODELS

HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
All Models
07BDE – Left Side Mounted

73.4
55.4 (1863)
(1408)
29.5
(748)

8.3 (TO INSIDE OF RAIL)


(211)

.8
(20)
STD EXT CREW
CAB CAB CAB

13.9 13.1
(353)
(334)

12.6 18.4 38.6


(32) (467) (979)
96.7
(2456)

07_0008
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4300 4x2, 4300 LP, 4400 4x2 and 4400 6x4 Models
07BEJ; Right Side Mounted Under Cab

2.3 CA LOSS
(58.0)

BACK OF
STD OR
EXT CAB

92.0 FWD
(2337.2)

6.5
(164.9)
26
(659.4)

4..3
(109.7)

18.4
32.4 11.2 (467.1)
(824) (284)
OUTSIDE OF RAIL
07_0025

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-19
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4x2, 4300 LP, 4400 4x2 AND 4400 6x4 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-20
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - LP, 4x2 AND 6X4 MODELS

HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE


LP, 4x2 and 6x4 Models
07BHU (Day Cab); Right Side Mounted

BOC to end of
aftertreatment system:
Std Cab = 36.35 (927)
BACK OF STD Ext Cab = 10.5 (267)
OR EXT CAB

5.5
95.1 (140)
(2416)

26.0 5.4
(137) 3.9
(660.1)
(99)
FWD
5.4
(137)
3.2
(81)
6.3 (160)
TO INSIDE OF RAIL
.4 (11.1)

13.5 (343) 14.9 12.9


27.5
TO OUTSIDE OF RAIL (699) (378) (328)

11.4 61.8
(291) (1570)
07_0009
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
LP and 4x2 Models
07BHU (Crew Cab); Right Side Mounted

BACK OF
CREW CAB

95.1
(2416.1)
5.5
(140.4)

26.0 5.4
(660.7) (138.3) 3.7
(94.3)
6.2
(157.3)

3.4
(87.0)
6.3 (TO INSIDE OF RAIL)
(159.5)

0.4
(11.1)

13.5 (TO INSIDE OF RAIL) 27.7 14.9 12.9


(342.6) 11.4 (702.9) (378.7) (328.1)
(290.1)
78.9
(2005.2)

07_0061

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-21
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - LP AND 4x2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-22
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4x2, 6x4 AND LP MODELS
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4x2, 6x4 and LP Models
07BHU (Day and Extended Cab); Right Side Mounted

BOC to end of
aftertreatment system:
BACK OF STD
Std Cab = 36.35 (927)
OR EXT CAB
Ext Cab = 10.5 (267)

95.1
(2416)
5.5
(140)

3.9
26.0 5.4 (99)
(660) (137) FWD
41.0
(1041) 3.2
(81)
6.3 (TO INSIDE OF RAIL)
(160)
.5
(12)

13.9
(353)

13.5 (TO INSIDE OF RAIL) 18.4


11.4 (467)
(343) (291) 68.8
(1748)
07_0011
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4x2, 6x4 and LP Models
07BHU (Crew Cab); Right Side Mounted

FWD
BACK OF
CREW
CAB

95.1
5.5
(2416)
(140)

5.4
26.0
(137) 3.7
(660.7)
(94)
6.2
(157)
3.4
6.3 (87)
(160)
TO INSIDE
.4
OF RAIL
(11)

13.9
(353)

13.5 21.5 12.1


11.4
(343) (545) (307)
(290)
TO INSIDE OF RAIL 79.5
(2019)
07_0012

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-23
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4x2, 6x4 AND LP MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-24
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 6x4 Models
07BHT; Right Side Mounted Under Cab

FWD

95.1
(2416)
26.0
(660)
5.4
(138) 5.5 (140)
7.7
3.9 (99)
(196)

3.2 (81)

14.9 TO INSIDE
(378) OF RAIL

10.6
26.5
7.0 (270)
(673)
(178)
43.4
(1102)
07_0016
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4300 and 4400 Models
07BHS (Day and Extended Cab); Left Side Mounted

BOC to end of
aftertreatment system:
Std Cab = 36.35 (927) BACK OF STD
Ext Cab = 10.5 (267) OR EXT CAB

FWD
95.1
5.5 (2416)
(1404)

3.9 5.4 26.0


(99) (137) (660)

41.0
(1041)
3.2 6.3
(82) (160) TO INSIDE
OF RAIL
.5
(12)

13.9
(353)

18.4
(467)
11.4 13.5
68.8 (290) (343) TO INSIDE OF
(1748)
RAIL

07_0013

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-25
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 AND 4400 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-26
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 AND 4400 MODELS
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4300 and 4400 Models
07BHS; Left Side Mounted - Crew Cab

95.1
(2415)
5.5
(140)
5.4 26.0
(137) (660)
FWD 3.7
(94)
6.2
(157)

3.4
(87) 6.3
(160) TO INSIDE
OF RAIL

.4
(10)
13.9
(353)
12.1
(307) 21.5
13.5
(546)
(343) TO INSIDE
79.5 OF RAIL
(2019)
07_0014
VERTICAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
07BDS; Right Side Mounted

17.6
(447) CA Loss

FWD
**

2.6
(66)
78.9 27.6
(2004) (701)

13.3
(337)

12.6 11.1 (282)


4.7
(119) (320)
23.9
(607)
** = Tailpipe Height

07_0017

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-27
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (EGR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-28
AFTERTREATMENT DIAGRAMS - 4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 AND 6x4 MODELS
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT AND VERTICAL TAIL PIPE
4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 6x4 Models
07BHR; Left Side Mounted Under Cab

95.1
(2416.1)
FWD

5.5
(140.4) 5.4 26.0
(138.3) (660.7)
3.9 7.7
(99.3) (196.8)
3.2
(82.0)

14.9 To Inside of Rail


(379.5)

10.6 26.5
(270.1) (672.3) 7.0
43.4 (178.1)
(1102.4)

07_0033
EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR)
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS
All Models
Navistar, Inc. has a responsibility to supply, install and ensure that the engines and aftertreatment emission control devices comply with the
certification requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the California Air Resources Board (ARB). The aftertreatment
devices may include a combination of particulate filters, catalysts, catalytic converter, and temperature and pressure sensors, along with other
components.

Proper long-term operation of these components requires controlling exhaust stream temperatures and the exhaust flow pattern throughout the
system. This controls the required location of the components as well as the insulation of the various parts of the system.

For this reason, application guidelines for aftertreatment and tailpipe installations are much more complex and restrictive than in the past. Navistar,
Inc. will ensure correct factory installation of aftertreatment devices to assure compliance with the certification requirements.

Modified systems could damage the engine, aftertreatment system and other truck systems and void the warranty coverage. In that regard,
Navistar, Inc. will make it a policy to procure and correctly install the appropriate aftertreatment devices pursuant to applicable specifications and
application guidelines. That brings with it the benefit of certified systems that will be fully covered under warranty provided the vehicle is properly
maintained and not modified beyond the extent allowed by the Body Builder book.

The following guidelines are meant to clarify the allowable modifications for aftertreatment systems. Please consult applicable federal, state and
local laws and requirements in conjunction with this document to ensure compliance to those requirements. Also, refer to applicable vehicle
warranty information before performing any modifications to the vehicle. Non-compliance to the requirements of the warranty may nullify it in its
entirety.
• Where possible, trucks first and foremost should be ordered directly from the factory that meets the body installation requirements so that
the minimum, or no modification of the exhaust system will be required.
• Relocation or modification of the Aftertreatment system or the turbo outlet piping is NOT permitted without approval from Navistar, Inc.
and the engine manufacturer. Requests for relocation or modification will be reviewed on a case by case basis.
• Exhaust Gas Temperatures may be as high as 800× C during vehicle operation. Precautions should be taken to ensure that materials
used in the vicinity of the exhaust system and exhaust gas stream can withstand these temperatures or are safely shielded.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-29
GUIDELINES FOR AFTERTREATMENT MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-30
TURBO PIPE - ALL MODELS
MEETING LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
It is the responsibility of the person performing modifications to the vehicle to ensure that the vehicle, in its final configuration, conforms
to any applicable law regarding emission control, noise level and applicable safety standards.

TURBO PIPE
The function of the Turbo Pipe is to deliver exhaust gases from the engine to the Aftertreatment Module so that temperature losses are minimized
and so that the flow pattern of the exhaust gases maximizes the efficiency of the Aftertreatment Module. Relocation or modification of the turbo
outlet piping is NOT permitted without approval from Navistar, inc. and the engine manufacturer. Requests for relocation or modification will be
reviewed on a case by case basis. Any modification to this piping without written approval of Navistar, Inc. will significantly reduce the performance
of the Aftertreatment Module and VOID any applicable warranty.

If so equipped, heat shields and protective wraps must be maintained on the vehicle to ensure the proper performance of the Aftertreatment Module
and for the protection of the installed truck systems.

AFTERTREATMENT MODULE
The function of the Aftertreatment Module is to catch soot exhausted from the engine and convert it to ash. In conjunction, it reduces oxides of
nitrogen (NOx) through SCR. It is critical that the all sensors and pressure monitoring wiring remain intact for the Aftertreatment Module to perform
as designed. It is critical to maintain the location of the Aftertreatment Module and all sensors as installed from the factory to ensure proper
operation. Relocation or modification of the Aftertreatment Module is NOT permitted without approval from Navistar, Inc. and the engine
manufacturer. Requests for relocation or modification will be reviewed on a case by case basis. Any modification to this Aftertreatment Module
without written approval of Navistar, inc. will significantly reduce the performance of the Aftertreatment module and VOID any applicable warranty.

If so equipped, heat shields and protective wraps must be maintained on the vehicle to ensure the proper performance of the Aftertreatment Module
and for the protection of the installed truck systems. In addition, heat shields and protective coverings may not be added to the Aftertreatment
module which would restrict airflow to the system.

Never mount any additional harnesses or other equipment to the Aftertreatment Module.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICE
The function of the Temperature Control Device (if so equipped) is to reduce the exit exhaust gas temperature emitted from the Aftertreatment Device.
This device has been specifically designed to draw in cooler air to mix with the hotter exhaust gases. It is critical that the openings in the device that
draw in cooler air remain unblocked of debris or other equipment. This device is critical to ensure that the emitted temperatures of the exhaust are
minimized. Any modifications to the Temperature Control Device without the written approval of Navistar, Inc. may significantly reduce the efficiency of
the Temperature Control Device and significantly increase the emitted gas temperatures, and VOID any applicable warranty.

If so equipped, any installed Temperature Control Device MUST remain as part of the exhaust piping.

Changes to the location of the Temperature Control Device relative to the Aftertreatment Module must meet federal emissions, noise and safety
requirements. The responsibility for demonstrating that legal requirements are met when modifications have been made belongs to the modifier of the
system.

If changing the location, special attention must be given to maintaining clearances around the exhaust piping, as well as maintaining the structural
integrity and exhaust backpressure of the system. Tables included in this document provide recommended clearances and back pressure estimation
procedures.

EXHAUST PIPING MODIFICATIONS


Never modify the internal structure of the Turbo Pipe, the Aftertreatment Module or the Temperature Control Device.

When lengthening or shortening tailpipes beyond the Aftertreatment Module, observe the following precautions:
1. Use the same size and material to extend or shorten the original pipe.
• Refer to Table 3 for proper material and sizing of pipes when extending or shortening tailpipe sections.
2. Adding additional extensions and bends will change internal exhaust gas pressure, which could result in damage to the Aftertreatment Module or
other engine components as well as a reduction in fuel economy.
• Use the backpressure values from the engine data sheets to compute the backpressure of the modified exhaust piping. Ensure that the
limits are within the data sheet when tested per the backpressure test procedure.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-31
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICE - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-32
MOUNTING OF BODY EQUIPMENT - ALL MODELS
3. Additional piping should be supported so that minimal stress is placed on the Aftertreatment Module outlet. The bending moment on the outlet of
the Aftertreatment Module cannot exeed 10 N-m @ 1 G acceleration. As a guide, one additional support should be included for every 4 linear feet of
exhaust piping added, evenly spaced along the length of the chassis.
The exhaust piping should be routed so that the Temperature Control Device, if so equipped, is at the end of the exhaust pipe and oriented in the
same manner as received from the factory.

Route all piping with minimum clearances to other chassis components as shown in Table 4.

MOUNTING OF BODY EQUIPMENT


In comparison to vehicles produced prior to 2007, exhaust components surface temperatures and exhaust gas temperatures will typically be higher.

As a result of the increased temperatures, clearances to exhaust components will need to be increased compared to pre-2007 model year
clearances.

Typical installation clearances used for pre-2007 model year engines and exhaust systems should be increased by 40% to ensure that body
equipment is not damaged by the increased heat of these systems.

Do not mount any Body Equipment within 8 inches (200mm) of the exhaust pipe outlet to avoid damage from hot exhaust gases.

When modifying other chassis systems, maintain clearances shown in Table 4.

Table 3
Tailpipe Extension, Material and Pipe Sizing
Navistar N9
Pipe Material 409 Stainless Steel
Pipe Diameter 4”
Wall Thickness 0.065”
Cummins ISB
409 Stainless Steel 409 Stainless Steel
4” 4”
0.065” 0.065”
Table 4

Minimum Clearances Between Exhaust System


Components and Other Chassis Components

Component Minimum Clearance, mm (in)

Electric Harness 150 (6.0)

Electric Harness (w. heat guard) 100 (4.0)

Mechanical Cable 50 (2.0)

Fuel Tube, metal 150 (6.0)

Fuel Tube, rubber or plastic 150 (6.0)

Brake Tube, metal 100 (4.0)

Brake Tube, rubber or plastic 150 (6.0)

Tire 100 (4.0)

Fuel Tank 100 (4.0)

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-33
MOUNTING OF BODY EQUIPMENT - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-34
BACKPRESSURE DATA SHEETS - MAXIMUM BACKPRESSURE VALUES
BACKPRESSURE DATA SHEETS
Maximum Backpressure Values
Navistar N9
Engine Rating Maximum Backpressure
Clean DPF - Worst Case Clean DPF - Worst Case
HP
Configuration (in-Hg) Configuration (kPa)
275 10.4 35.3
300 11.2 37.8
315 11.6 39.4
330 12.1 40.9

Cummins ISB
HP (in-Hg) (kPa)
200 8.9 30
220 9.7 33
240 10.4 35
250 10.9 37
260 11.0 37
280 12.6 43
300 13.5 46
325 14.5 49
340 15.8 53
360 17.0 57

Refer to the “Backpressure Test Procedure” on page 35.


BACKPRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
Test Method for Measuring Exhaust Backpressure
NOTE: The exhaust backpressure is required for a fully assembled system including DPF, SCR device and any diffuser device
installed.
• Perform a non-mission regeneration on the DPF system to ensure it is clean prior to checking exhaust backpressure
• Connect a manometer or pressure gauge which reads up to 272 in H2O, 20 in Hg, 10 psi. 508 mm Hg or 68 kPa in a straight section of 4 inch diameter
exhaust pipe, 3 to 4 pipe diameters downstream of the exhaust engine outlet flange. Turbulence in the exiting gas flow from VGT turbochargers results in the
need to measure exhaust backpressure at this distance from the outlet flange. The port in the exhaust pipe should be smooth and free of burrs to give an
accurate pressure reading.
• Determine the engine speed which delivers the maximum exhaust flow. This is the engine speed which should be used for this test. Testing should be
conducted at ambient temperatures between 21 to 38 deg C (70 - 100 deg F).
• Run the engine at full power output on a vehicle chassis dynamometer or a long uphill climb at the correct engine speed for at least 10 minutes or until
stabilized power output is achieved, and record the exhaust backpressure reading.
• For industrial engines, load the engine to the speed at which the maximum exhaust flow occurs for at least 10 minutes and record the exhaust backpressure
reading.
• If this testing is done on a long hill climb, it may be necessary to repeat the test in different gears or use the vehicle brakes to achieve the desired engine
speed. If testing on road, the hill used must be steep enough that with the engine at full throttle, the vehicle speed is steady or dropping when the exhaust
backpressure is recorded to ensure the engine is at full power output.
• If engine turbocharger boost pressure is also recorded during this test, the pressure at the turbo compressor outlet can be compared to the Turbo
Compressor Outlet Pressure on the Engine Data Sheet to ensure the engine is at full power output. The measured turbocharger boost pressure should be
within 75mm Hg (3 in Hg) of the value on the Engine Data Sheet with the engine at full power.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-35
BACKPRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE - TEST METHOD FOR MEASURING EXHAUST BACKPRESSURE
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-36
BACKPRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE - EXHAUST BACKPRESSURE TEST RESULTS
BACKPRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (CONT’D)
Exhaust Backpressure Test Results

Engine Model and Power Rating


Engine Sped for Maximum Exhaust Flow
Measured Exhaust Back Pressure at Full Power Output:
-in H2O
-in Hg
-psi
-mm Hg
-kPa
Test Location:
-On Dynamometer?
-On Road?

NOTE: When the exhaust back pressure measurement is taken in a pipe diameter other than 4 inches, then the measured values
must be adjusted to account for the change.
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BEM (Day and Extended Cab); Switchback Horizontal with Short Horizontal Tailpipe Mounted Right Side BOC

durastar_07bem_day_ext

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-37
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BEM (DAY AND EXTENDED CAB); SWITCHBACK HORIZONTAL WITH SHORT HORIZONTAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE BOC
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-38
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BEM (CREW CAB); SWITCHBACK HORIZONTAL WITH SHORT HORIZONTAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE BOC

HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BEM (Crew Cab); Switchback Horizontal with Short Horizontal Tailpipe Mounted Right Side BOC

durastar_07bem_crew
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BEP (Day Cab); Switchback Horizontal with Single Vertical Tailpipe Mounted Right Side BOC

durastar_07bep_day

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-39
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BEP (DAY CAB); SWITCHBACK HORIZONTAL WITH SINGLE VERTICAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE BOC
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-40
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BEP (CREW CAB); SWITCHBACK HORIZONTAL WITH SINGLE VERTICAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE BOC
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BEP (Crew Cab); Switchback Horizontal with Single Vertical Tailpipe Mounted Right Side BOC

durastar_07bep_crew
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BEP (Extended Cab); Switchback Horizontal with Single Vertical Tailpipe Mounted Right Side BOC

durastar_07bep_ext

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-41
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BEP (EXTENDED CAB); SWITCHBACK HORIZONTAL WITH SINGLE VERTICAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE BOC
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-42
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BET; SWITCHBACK HORIZONTAL WITH LONG HORIZONTAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE UNDER CAB
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BET; Switchback Horizontal with Long Horizontal Tailpipe Mounted Right Side Under Cab

durastar_07bet_day_ext_crew
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BJY; Inline Horizontal with Short Horizontal Tailpipe Mounted Right Side

durastar_07bjy_day_ext_crew

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-43
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BJY; INLINE HORIZONTAL WITH SHORT HORIZONTAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-44
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BKM (4300 4X2, NON-LP MODELS); INLINE HORIZONTAL WITH SHORT HORIZONTAL TAILPIPE FRAME MOUNTED RIGHT SIDE
HORIZONTAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BKM (4300 4x2, Non-LP Models); Inline Horizontal with Short Horizontal Tailpipe Frame Mounted Right Side

durastar_4300_4x2_07bkm_nonLP
VERTICAL AFTERTREATMENT
07BJX (Day Cab); Switchback Vertical with Single Vertical Tailpipe Mounted Left and Right Side

durastar_07bjx_day

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-45
VERTICAL AFTERTREATMENT - 07BJX (DAY CAB); SWITCHBACK VERTICAL WITH SINGLE VERTICAL TAILPIPE MOUNTED LEFT AND RIGHT SIDE
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-46
GENERAL EXHAUST INFORMATION - SCR MODELS
GENERAL EXHAUST INFORMATION
SCR Models
Navistar will offer three main DPF and SCR exhaust systems. A right hand under cab DPF and SCR system (switchback) with horizontal or vertical
tailpipes, with both catalyst located underneath the cab access steps. A horizontal DPF and SCR with horizontal or vertical tailpipes, which is
installed along the right hand rail. A vertical/vertical independent DPF and SCR located vertically back of cab on stanchion brackets.

Medium Duty with Switchback with Vertical Tailpipe 15_0210


Havy Duty Severe Service with Swichback with Vertical Tailpipe 15_0211

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-47
GENERAL EXHAUST INFORMATION - SCR MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-48
GENERAL EXHAUST INFORMATION - SCR MODELS

Heavy Duty Line Haul with Switchback with Vertical Tailpipe 15_0212
Medium Duty with Inline with Horizontal Tailpipe 15_0213

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-49
GENERAL EXHAUST INFORMATION - SCR MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER EXHAUST SYSTEM (SCR) • 07 FEBRUARY 2015 — 07-50
GENERAL EXHAUST INFORMATION - SCR MODELS

Heavy Duty with Vertical Vertical with Vertical Tailpipe 15_0214

Body Builders must not modify (including altering, substituting, and relocating) the DPF/SCR catalyst and the pre DPF/SCR exhaust piping. The
downstream SCR catalyst exhaust may be modified, however using smaller diameter piping or piping with numerous bends is not recommend as
the backpressure specification of the system may be exceeded causing engine power loss or shutdown.
ELECTRICAL
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
Mounted Right Side Under Cab, With Rectangular Style Fuel Tanks

CREW EXT. REG.


CAB CAB CAB
17.91 (REF) 25.98 (REF)
(455) (660)

32.15
(817)
FWD

7.44 27.24
(189) (692)

4.69 32.76
(119) (832

4.62
(117)
08_0010

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-1


BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-2
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
Mounted Right Side Under Cab, With Rectangular Style Fuel Tanks

CREW EXT. REG.


CAB CAB CAB
17.91 (REF) 25.98 (REF)
(455) (660)

33.62
(854)

FWD

7.44 27.24
(189) (692)
4.69 32.76
(119) (832)

A
B

08_0011

A= 13.47 (342) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks


16.17 (411) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks
B= 11.72 (298) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks
14.42 (366) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
Mounted Left Side Under Cab, With Rectangular Style Fuel Tanks

REG. EXT. CREW


CAB CAB CAB

25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF)


(660) (455)

32.15
(817)
FWD

27.24 7.44
(692) (189)

32.76 4.69
(832) (119)

4.62
(117)
08_0012

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-3


BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-4
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
Mounted Left Side Under Cab, With “D” Style Fuel Tanks

REG. EXT. CREW


CAB CAB CAB

25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF)


(660) (455)

FWD 33.62
(854)

27.24 7.44
(692) (189)

32.76 4.69
(832) (119)

A
B

08_0013

A= 13.47 (342) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks


16.17 (411) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks
B= 11.72 (298) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks
14.42 (366) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tank
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR)

Day or Extended Cab


Mounted Left Side Back of Cab, With Dual Fuel Tanks

REG. EXT.
CAB CAB

25.98 (REF)
(660)

FWD 23.88
(607)

8.15 27.24
(207) (692)

3.81
(97)
08_0014

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-5


BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR) - DAY OR EXTENDED CAB
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-6
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR) - CREW CAB
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR)

Crew Cab
Mounted Left Side Under Cab, With Rectangular Style Fuel Tanks

CREW
CAB

32.15
(817)
FWD

27.24 8.50
(692) (216)
32.76 5.75
(832) (146)

4.62
(117)
08_0015
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR)

Crew Cab
Mounted Left Side Under Cab, With “D” Style Fuel Tanks

CREW CAB

33.62
(854)
FWD

27.24 8.50
(692) (216)
32.76 5.75
(832) (146)

A
B

08_0016

A= 13.47 (342) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks


16.17 (411) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks
B= 11.72 (298) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks
14.42 (366) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-7


BATTERY BOX LOCATION (EGR) - CREW CAB
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-8
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR) - DAY AND EXTENDED CAB
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR)

Day and Extended Cab


Mounted Left Side Under Cab, 25” Wide, 2 or 3 Battery Capacity (08VTJ)

durastar_08vtj_day_ext_top_side_view
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR)
4300 4x2 (non LP)
Mounted 53” Back of Cab, Left Side Perpendicular to Frame Rail (08VUN)

durastar_08vtj_day_ext_top_side_view

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-9


BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR) - 4300 4X2 (NON LP)
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-10
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR) - DAY CAB
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR)

Day Cab
Mounted 53” Back of Cab, Left Side Perpendicular to Frame Rail (08WJJ)

durastar_08wjj_day_cab_top_&_left_view
BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR)

Day Cab
Mounted Left Side Under Cab, 14” Wide, 3 Battery Capacity (08XDU)

durastar_08xdu_day_cab_top_&_left_view

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-11


BATTERY BOX LOCATION (SCR) - DAY CAB
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-12
SCR ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS - DAY CAB
SCR ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
For electrical body builder integration, refer to Publication S8323, Electrical Systems Service Manual Body Builder.
COOLING OBSTRUCTION GUIDELINES

All Models

TO SUPPORT THE COOLING


AIR FLOW DESIGN, MOUNT
COMPONENTS OUTBOARD OF
THE RADIATOR CORE AREA ONLY

AUXILIARY COMPONENTS CANNOT BE MOUNTED IN


BUMPER CENTER OPENING. ONLY THE FOG LIGHT
OPTION (08WPM) CAN OCCUPY THIS SPACE.
08_0024

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-13


COOLING OBSTRUCTION GUIDELINES - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ELECTRICAL • 08 FEBRUARY 2015 — 08-14
COOLING OBSTRUCTION GUIDELINES - ALL MODELS
FIFTH WHEEL
FIFTH WHEEL HEIGHT CALCULATIONS

10_0001

Calculate the fifth wheel height (measured from the ground) using the following formula:

FH = Z + F (for unloaded chassis)

where:

FH = Fifth Wheel Height (from ground to top of 5th wheel) - RR + RH + FR + F


Z = Frame Height (@ centerline oFf rear axle with an unloaded chassis)
F = Distance from the top of the frame rails to the top of the fifth wheel
FR = Frame Rail – Overall Height
RH = Ride Height of Rear Suspension
RR = Rolling Radius

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-1


FIFTH WHEEL HEIGHT CALCULATIONS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-2
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
Outlined below are recommended guidelines for installation of fifth wheels on vehicles. The more common combinations of frame, suspension, fifth
wheel and fifth wheel offset dimensions are covered in this section. For mounting applications not covered in this section, refer to the fifth wheel
manufacturer for installation instructions.
NOTE: It must be recognized that the ultimate responsibility for the durability and security of the fifth wheel mounting lies with the installer/user.
Therefore, the installer/user is cautioned to consult the fifth wheel manufacturer's installation recommendations and whatever legal requirements
and regulations are applicable.
It is also the responsibility of the installer/user to make sure that the vehicle frame is adequate for the fifth wheel offset location from the centerline of
the single rear axle (4 x 2 vehicles) or tandem rear axle (6 x 4 vehicles).
Precautions
As with any after-market modification, care must be taken when installing a fifth wheel. The following precautions must be taken when installing a
fifth wheel.

CAUTION: Do not weld or drill the top or bottom flanges of the vehicle frame. Welding or
drilling the flanges will severely weaken the frame.
Do not drill frame sidemember(s) other than as specified in “FRAMES - Drilling or Notching”.
Fifth wheel attachments must not be welded directly to the sidemember.
Maintenance
The fifth wheel should be properly maintained to ensure proper operation. The following is a general guideline for maintaining the fifth wheel.
1. Always keep the track of sliding fifth wheels as clean as possible.
Periodically lubricate all moving parts of fixed and sliding fifth wheels.
2. Inspect fifth wheel for proper operation.
3. Inspect fifth wheel for damaged or missing parts. Replace as required.
4. Be sure all bolts retaining fifth wheel assembly to vehicle frame are properly tightened.
Replacement
REMOVE
1. Remove all bolts retaining fifth wheel to mounting angle.
2. Remove fifth wheel assembly from vehicle frame.
INSTALL
1. Position fifth wheel assembly on mounting angles. Be sure to properly align bolt holes in angle bracket to fifth wheel.
2. Install all retaining bolts and tighten to the specified torque.
Mounting
MOUNTING ANGLES
The use of mounting angles to mount the fifth wheel to the vehicle frame is recommended. Mounting angles provide for more direct transfer of the load to the
frame sidemembers for better stress distribution. Some fifth wheels incorporate integral mounting angles as part of the fifth wheel assembly.

1. FRAME
2 .FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING ANGLE

Figure 4.1 Fifth Wheel Mounting Angle 10_0002

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-3


FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-4
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
Mounting angles must be made of steel conforming to SAE J410, grade 965X, 0.312 inch (8 mm) thick; or ASTM A572, grade 50, 0.38 inch (9.6 mm) thick; or
conform to fifth wheel manufacturer's specifications that cover your particular circumstances.
It is permissible to cut mounting angles to provide clearance for spring mounting brackets, etc. Cutouts in the vertical flanges of the mounting angles should be
minimized in number and size. Cutouts must be rounded at the inside corners. Inner radii of cutouts should be 0.5 inch (13 mm) minimum; 0.75 inch (19.0 mm)
radii are preferred.
To make cutouts in mounting angles, drill holes at radii of cutouts. Then, saw or torch cut to remove remaining material. Cut edges should be ground smooth.

1. 2 INCHES (51 mm) RECOMMENDED MINIMUM


2. DRILL HOLES AT CORNERS
3. 0.5 INCH (13 mm) RADIUS (MINIMUM)

Figure 4.2 Mounting Angle Cutout 10_0003

Some vehicles have spring mounting brackets designed to permit installation of fifth wheel mounting angle between the spring bracket and vehicle frame.
Remove factory installed spacers to install mounting angles. Re-tighten bolts as specified in the Torque Chart.

1. SPACER (REMOVE)
2. MOUNTING ANGLE

Figure 4.3 Mounting Angle Position 10_0004

Mounting angles should be secured to frame sidemembers using quantity and spacing of bolts as determined by following the guidelines provided in this
section.
MOUNTING BOLTS
The use of phosphate and oil coated SAE Grade 8 flanged fasteners is recommended. Where flanged fasteners are not available, the use of hardened steel
flat washers under bolt head and nut is recommended.
Where locations of mounting bolts are limited by cutouts, the new bolt pattern should conform as closely as possible to recommendations in terms of number
of fasteners, edge distances and spacings.
For horizontal bolt applications (mounting angle-to-frame sidemember), use 5/8-inch (16 mm) diameter bolts. Tighten nuts as specified in the “Bolt Torque
Chart (Phosphate and Oil Coated)” (Table 4.1).
For vertical bolt applications (fifth wheel-to-mounting angle, fifth wheel-to-support plate, fifth wheel-to-cross tie, cross tie-to-mounting angle), use 3/4-inch (19
mm) diameter bolts. These bolts must be flanged head or hex head with hardened flat washers. Tighten nuts as specified in “Bolt Torque Chart (Phosphate
and Oil Coated)” (Table 4.1).
NOTE: Some sliding and fixed fifth wheels are designed to use 5/8-inch (16 mm) diameter vertical bolts. These are acceptable where specified by
design.
Care must be taken to prevent fretting (chafing) damage to frame top flange by sharp edges on fifth wheel mounting parts. Figure 4.4 illustrates methods of
preventing fretting (chafing) damage at leading and trailing edges. These methods include:
1. Chamfering the edges of fifth wheel mounting parts contacting frame top flange.
2. Use of a “flex-lip” to gradually diminish contact forces.

1. FIFTH WHEEL BASE


2. CHAMFER (30-45°)
3. 1.5 INCH (38.1 mm) MINIMUM
4. FLEX LIP

Figure 4.4 Methods of Preventing Fretting Damage 10_0005

Fifth wheel and mounting parts should be positioned on the vehicle frame to provide maximum contact between the parts which transfer the vertical load onto
the upper flange of the frame. Clamp to assure contact before tightening bolts.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-5


FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-6
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
Fixed (Non-Sliding) Fifth Wheels
Typical installations of fixed (non-sliding) fifth wheels are illustrated in Figure 4.5, Figure 4.6, Figure 4.7, Figure 4.8, Figure 4.9, and Figure 4.10.
Mounting angles should be secured to frame sidemembers with a minimum of five bolts per side with bolt spacing as shown in Figure 4.5.
Recommended fixed fifth wheel mounting dimension limits are shown in Figure 4.5. These limits are as follows:

Dimension “A”
(Trunnion centerline spacing) 29 to 34 inches (736 to 863 mm).
Dimension “B”
(Fifth wheel offset with respect to rear axle or tandem rear axle
centerline) 0 to 24 inches (0 to 609 mm).
Dimension “C”
(Fifth wheel pivot height above frame) 6 inches (152.4 mm)
maximum.

Figure 4.5 Fixed Fifth Wheel Mounting Dimension Limits (Typical) 10_0006
Fixed (Non-Sliding) Fifth Wheels (Continued)
Be sure to refer to the segments in this section for mounting angle and cutout information, bolt sizes and torque specifications and corrosion
protection on aluminum frames.

Failure to follow the recommended procedures in this section may result in damage to the
vehicle frame and possible injury to the operator.

For vehicle frame assemblies without bogie gussets or “C” channel frame reinforcements, install a set of flat cross ties as shown in Figure 4.6
and Figure 4.7.

Figure 4.6 Cross Tie Installation (Typical) 10_0007

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-7


FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-8
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
Fixed (Non-Sliding) Fifth Wheels (Continued)

Figure 4.7 Cross Tie Welding (Typical) 10_0008

For bolted base type fifth wheels, bolt the cross ties and spacers as shown in Figure 4.6. For fifth wheels with integral mounting angle, weld the
cross ties as shown in Figure 4.7.
Cross ties should be a minimum of 0.31 inch (8.0 mm) thick x 5 inches (127 mm) wide. Recommended material is 0.31 inch (8.0 mm) thick HSLA
80,000 PSI yield material (SAE 980X).
For bolted base type fifth wheels, a single flat plate or a corrugated plate can be used instead of cross ties. The flat plate should have the bolt
pattern shown in Figure 4.8 (top view). The corrugated plate should be installed as shown in Figure 4.8.
For vehicle frame assemblies which have bogie gussets (such as a typical Hendrickson suspension) many fifth wheel installations may be made
without cross ties as shown in Figure 4.9 and Figure 4.10. Cross ties may be required in some cases, as indicated.
Fixed (Non-Sliding) Fifth Wheels (Continued)

Figure 4.8 Plate Installation (Typical) 10_0009

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-9


FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-10
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
Fixed (Non-Sliding) Fifth Wheels (Continued)

Figure 4.9 Fifth Wheel Installation Without Cross Ties (Typical) 10_0010
Fixed (Non-Sliding) Fifth Wheels (Continued)

Figure 4.10 Fifth Wheel Installation Without Cross Ties (Typical) 10_0011

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-11


FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-12
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
Sliding Fifth Wheels
These guidelines apply to sliding fifth wheel assemblies where the rails or tracks are tied together on a mounting plate or with cross ties.
A typical installation of a sliding fifth wheel is illustrated in Figure 4.11.

Figure 4.11 Sliding Fifth Wheel Installation (Typical) 10_0012

Mounting angles should be secured to frame sidemembers with bolts, the minimum number of which are to be determined by dividing the
distance between the front and rear bolt holes, as shown in Figure 4.11, by 7.0 inches (177.8 mm) and adding 1.
Recommended sliding fifth wheel mounting dimension limits are as follows:
Dimension “B” (Fifth wheel offset with respect to bogie centerline) 0 to 36 inches (0 to 914 mm) maximum.
Dimension “C” (Fifth wheel pivot height above frame) 6.0 inches (152.4 mm) maximum.
Sliding fifth wheels, because of their length and construction techniques, are prone to warping and misalignment. This along with vehicle frame
variations makes it necessary to check and correct for proper fit where needed.
Torque
Table 4.1
Bolt Torque Chart (Phosphate and Oil Coated)

Specified Torque
Bolt Size
Flange Head Hex Head
(Type 8)
Ft-Lb. N-m Ft-Lb. N-m

5/8 200-240 271-325 145-175 197-237

3/4 300-370 406-502 250-300 339-406

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-13


FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FIFTH WHEEL • 10 FEBRUARY 2015 — 10-14
FIFTH WHEEL MOUNTING INFORMATION
ENGINE
ENGINE LOCATION
All Models
Engine Center Point (ECP) = Center Point of Flywheel Hous
A - Engine/Power Angle
B - Front Suspension Eye to ECP
C - Top Face of Bottom Flange to ECP
D - Engine Offset to Chassis CL
E - Engine Roll

12_0024

Model Engine A B C D E
4300, 4400 MaxxForce® DT/9 (EGR) 3.5° 49.02" (1245 mm) 2.20" (56 mm) 0° 0°

4300 4x2 Cummins® ISB (SCR) 3.5° 47.40” (1204 mm) 1.27” (32.3 mm) 0° 0°

4400 Navistar® N9 (SCR) 3.5° 49.02” (1245 mm) 2.20” (56 mm) 0° 0°

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-1


ENGINE LOCATION - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-2
ENGINE LOCATION - MODELS 4300 AND 4400 (MAXXFORCE® DT/9 ENGINES)
ENGINE PORT LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4300 and 4400 (MaxxForce® DT/9 Engines)

Type NPTF Usage


Water
W1 – BLOCK HEATER
W2 M33 CAB HEATER RETURN
W3 – CAB HEATER SUPPLY
W4 M18 OIL COOLER DRAIN
W5 – WATER INLET
W6 – WATER OUTLET
W7 1 inch hose barb HEATER SUPPLY-OPTIONAL
W8 – LOW TEMP RADIATOR SUPPLY
LOW TEMP RADIATOR RETURN /
W9 –
12_0218 INTERSTTAE COOLER INLET
W10 – INTERSTAGE COOLER VENT
LEFT SIDE
W11 – CYLINDER HEAD VENT
W12 – EGR COOLER VENT
W13 – SURGE TANK RETURN
Oil
L1 M12 OIL FILTER SUPPLY – AUX.
L2 M12 OIL FILTER RETURN – AUX.
Fuel
F1 – FUEL INLET
F2 – FUEL RETURN

12_0219
RIGHT SIDE
ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR)

Navistar N9 Engine (Front)

Type NPTF Usage


Water
W1 — BLOCK HEATER
W6 — WATER OUTLET
W7 — INTERSTAGE COOLER VENT
W8 — CYLINDER HEAD VENT
Fuel
F1 — FUEL INLET
F2 — FUEL RETURN
Oil
L1 — OIL FILL & DIPSTICK

N9_N10_Engine_Port_Front

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-3


ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR) - NAVISTAR N9 ENGINE (FRONT)
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-4
ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR) - NAVISTAR N9 ENGINE (REAR)
ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR)

Navistar N9 Engine (Rear)

Type NPTF Usage


Water
W2 M33 CAB HEATER RETURN
W3 — CAB HEATER SUPPLY
W4 M16 OIL COOLER DRAIN
W5 — WATER INLET
W6 — WATER OUTLET
W7 — INTERSTAGE COOLER VENT
W8 — CYLINDER HEAD VENT
W9 — EGR COOLER VENT
W10 — SURGE TANK RETURN
DO NOT USE THIS
W11 —
COOLING CIRCUIT

N9_N10_Engine_Port_Rear
ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR)

Cummins ISB Engine (Left Front)

Type NPTF Usage


Fuel
F1 — FUEL INLET
F2 — FUEL RETURN
Oil
L1 — OIL FILL
L2 — DIPSTICK

Cummins_ISB_Left_Front

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-5


ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR) - CUMMINS ISB ENGINE (LEFT FRONT)
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-6
ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR) - CUMMINS ISB ENGINE (RIGHT REAR)
ENGINE PORT LOCATION (SCR)

Cummins ISB Engine (Right Rear)

Type Usage

Water

W1 Heater Supply

W2 Heater Return

W3 Engine Vent

W4 Coolant Inlet

W5 Coolant Outlet

W6 Block Heater

W7 Surge Line

W8 DEF Coolant Supply

W9 DEF Coolant Return

Cummins_ISB_Right_Rear
WATER COOLER MOUNTING

Models 4400
Codes 12WYK and 12WZG

VIEW A

AUXILIARY COOLER
STIFFENER BRACKET
& CLAMP

AUXILIARY COOLER
MOUNTING BRACKET
ASSEMBLY

SENDURE AUXILIARY
ENGINE COOLER

1/2 NPTF THREAD

VIEW A
SCALE 1:2
12_0016

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-7


WATER COOLER MOUNTING - MODELS 4400
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-8
WATER COOLER MOUNTING - MODELS 4400
Engine Parameters for Fire Pumper (Split Shaft & Transmission Mounted) - MaxxForce Engines DT, 9 and 10
This information is designed to be a guideline in setting up the parameters for a specific application and is not all-encompassing.
Email Questions or Concerns to performanceengineering@navistar.com

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
0 - Disable
1 - Exhaust Brake Latched
Determines the conditions that the engine brake feature will be functional. If set to: 2 - Exhaust Brake Coast
0 - The engine brake functionality is disabled. 3 - Transmission Brake Latched
2
1, 3 or 4 - The engine brake is active after the accelerator pedal is released. 4 - Compression Brake Latched
Vehicle Retarder Control *Customer Chosen -
Engine Brake

70003 7000 2 or 5 - The engine brake is active only while the service brake pedal is pressed. 5 - Compression Brake Coast
Mode Depends on
6 - The engine brake is active when the accelerator pedal is released and cruise mode is active; 6 - Compression Brake with Cruise Control
installed brake.
in this mode, the engine brake acts to maintain a set speed (typically when traveling down a 7 - Exhaust Brake with Cruise Control
grade).
NOTE: Mode 7 is not functional for Inline applications
but may show up in the Programming/Service Tool.

Allows the VRE to be disabled when the Remote Throttle is in use. 0 - Enable VRE Control
VRE Disable when RPS Active 70091 7009 1 - Disable VRE Control when Remote Throttle is Customer Chosen
*Only a concern if there is a possibility that engine braking may interfere with remote throttle. active

Determines the conditions under which the idle shutdown feature will be functional. If set to:
0 - The idle shutdown timer is disabled.
1 - The idle shutdown timer sequence will be prevented and the engine will not shut down while
the PTO or any auxiliary engine speeds control is actively ramping the engine above normal
engine idle speed. 0 - Disable
2 - The engine may shutdown if PTO engine speed control is engaged. This allows the engine to 1 - PTO Option
Idle Shutdown Timer Mode 74001 7400 0
stay running, for example, if the operator desires to have the engine speed ramped up during 2 - No Load Option
PTO operation. This mode also prevents the operator from setting the engine speed with a 3 - Tamper Proofing Option
minimum load (e.g., 10% engine torque) without actually engaging the PTO with the intent of
Idle Shutdown Timer

bypassing the idle shutdown timer.


3 - The engine may shutdown if PTO engine speed control is engaged. Puts the feature in
tamper proofing mode. Refer to the tamper proofing section for more information.

Sets the amount of engine idle time before the idle shutdown feature will initiate an engine
shutdown.

Engine Idle Shutdown Time 74010 7401 NOTE: While the Electronic Service Tool is installed, this time may be extended regardless of 2 120 MIN 15
the parameter setting.

*If in PTO operation mode, this will not start counting.


Engine Idle Shutdown The idle shutdown feature will not shut down the engine above this temperature. This allows the
Maximum Intake Air 74021 7402 engine to stay running when temperatures are high in order to allow the air conditioning to -40 302 F 100°F
Temperature function for driver comfort, for example.
Engine Idle Shutdown The idle shutdown feature will not shut down the engine below this temperature. This allows the
Minimum Intake Air 74031 7403 engine to stay running when temperatures are low in order to allow the engine to stay warm for -40 302 F 45°F
Temperature engine protection, and to allow the heater to function for driver comfort, for example.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-9


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-10
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Parameters for Preset Engine Speed PTO Configuration
Determines the conditions that the Engine Speed Control (PTO) feature will be functional. Set
this parameter to enable PTO operation and to choose which inputs are used for control. If set
to:
0 - The PTO functionality is disabled.
1 - Only the remote PTO inputs will be able to control PTO (See NOTE 2). 0 - Disable
Aux Throttle Control - 2 - Only the in-cab inputs will be able to control PTO. 1 - Remote Operation Only
75001 7500 3
l-Mode 3 - Both remote and in-cab inputs will be able to control PTO (See NOTE 1 & 2). 2 - In-Cab Operation Only
3 - Remote and In-Cab Operation
NOTE 1: The last input received will take priority when Mode 3 is selected.

NOTE 2: Mode 1 and the remote portion of Mode 3 are discussed in the Remote Engine Speed
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control

Control document.
This parameter is the maximum vehicle speed that the PTO will be allowed to operate.
Aux Throttle Control -
75011 7501 NOTE: Set this parameter to the maximum vehicle speed that the PTO is typically used. 0 20 MPH 5
Maximum Vehicle Speed
*Only applicable if in mobile variable mode for any speed above 0 MPH.

Set this parameter after selecting In-Cab or Remote and In-Cab Operation to determine which
PTO mode is active. If set to:
0 - The switches will not be used. Refer to the Remote Engine Speed Control document.
0 - None
1 - The switches will be used to select up to 6 preset engine speeds. Refer to the Stationary
Aux Throttle Control B26 - 1 - Stationary Preset
75021 7502 Preset section for more information. 2
In-Cab Mode 2 - Stationary Variable
2 - The switches will be used to adjust the engine speed variably. Refer to the Stationary
3 - Mobile Variable
Variable section for more information.
3 - The switches will be used to adjust the engine speed to a desired set point to allow for
vehicle movement. Refer to the Mobile Variable section for more information.

Select this parameter when accelerator, brake or clutch is desired to be ignored during engine
speed control operation. If set to:
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - The accelerator, brake, and clutch are inputs used for PTO operation. 0 - Disable
75031 7503 1
In-Cab Operator Interface 1 - The accelerator, brake, and clutch will be ignored during PTO operation. 1 - Enable

NOTE: Use parameters (7510), (7511) and (7513) to provide the specific input options.
Sets the driveline mode for PTO operation.
Aux Throttle Control - Remote 0 - Disable
75041 7504 1
Pedal Enable 1 - Enable
NOTE: Set to 1 if engine speed is to be controlled by remote throttle pedal.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the first (1st) PTO preset
speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Stationary Preset Range must be less than the following setting: PTO
Preset Engine Speed 1 75051 7505 1000
section for more information. Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
(SET/COAST)
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle value). 1, 3,
5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.
This parameter sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the second
(2nd) PTO preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Stationary Preset Range must be less than the following setting: PTO
Preset Engine Speed 2 75061 7506 1500
section for more information. Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
(RESUME/ACCEL)
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle value). 1, 3,
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control (Continued)

5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

This parameter sets the speed at which the engine will attempt to increase the engine speed.

NOTE 1: The engine only attempts to increase the engine speed at this rate because actual
engine changes are influenced by other factors such as engine load and available engine
Aux Throttle Control - power.
75071 7507 1 1500 RPM 100 RPM/SEC
Ramp Rate
NOTE 2: This parameter should be set to provide a smooth transition to the desired engine
speed to accommodate applicable PTO equipment.

*7507 is only active when variable modes are selected in 7502.


The maximum engine speed that can be reached using any PTO controls.
Aux Throttle Control -
75081 7508 2200
Maximum Engine Speed
NOTE: This parameter must be set properly to protect PTO related equipment.
Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the third (3rd) PTO preset
speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed twice.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Stationary Preset Range must be less than the following setting: PTO
Preset Engine 75091 7509 1000
section for more info. Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
Speed 3
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle value). 1, 3,
5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

This parameter sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the fourth
(4th) PTO preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed twice.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Stationary Preset Range must be less than the following setting: PTO
Preset Engine 75101 7510 1500
section for more information. Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
Speed 4
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle value). 1, 3,
5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-11


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-12
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the fifth (5th) PTO preset
speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed three times.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Stationary Preset Range must be less than the following setting: PTO
Preset Engine 75111 7511 1000
section for more information. Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
Speed 5
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle value). 1, 3,
5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.
Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the sixth (6th) PTO preset
speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed three times.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Stationary Preset Range must be less than the following setting: PTO
Preset Engine 75121 7512 1500
section for more information. Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
Speed 6
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle value). 1, 3,
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control (Continued)

5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.


Parameters for PTO Override Configurations
Aux Throttle Control – 0 - Return to Zero Required
75131 7513 Sets the return to Zero requirements for the Remote Pedal. 1
Return to Zero 1 - Return to Zero Not Required
Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Service Brake Disables PTO
75141 7514 Allows operator to set the Service Brake to disable the In-Cab PTO. 0
ATC with Service Brake 1 - Service Brake Does Not Change PTO

Allows the use of PTO without requiring the parking brake set.
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
0 - Parking Brake Disables PTO
ATC with Parking Brake 75151 7515 0
NOTE: Depending on the calibration; some calibrations have the Parking Brake interactions with 1 - Parking Brake Does Not Change PTO
Released
PTO disabled permanently.

Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Driveline Status Disables PTO operation


75161 7516 (7517) Allows operator to disable the ATC with In-Cab Controls. 0
ATC with Driveline Status 1 - Driveline Status Does Not Change PTO operation

Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - In-Cab Controls Disables PTO


75171 7517 Control - Disable ATC with In-Cab Controls 0
ATC with In-Cab Controls 1 - In-Cab controls Do Not Change PTO

Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Vehicle Speed Limit Disables PTO


75181 7518 Allows In-Cab PTO to be disabled with vehicle speed. 0
ATC with Vehicle Speed 1 - Vehicle Speed Limit Does Not Change PTO

This programmable parameter allows the operator to use a single switch to activate PTO
PRESET 1 or 2.
0 - Disable the ability to activate the PTO enable
NOTE 1: After PTO/ RPTO has been enabled, PTO and/ or RPTO will require a transition in the
signal (CC/PTO On, RPRE, RVAR) at the same time
state of the PTO control switches (CC RESUME/ SET, or RVAR/ RPRE switches) to transition to
Aux Throttle Control - as the PTO incrementing signal (Set, Resume)
75191 7519 a new PRESET mode from the current state. For example, a transition in the state of the PTO 0
SPDT Enable 1 - Enable the ability to activate the PTO enable
control switches would require a release of the CC SET switch then re-activation to transition
signal (CC/PTO On, RPRE, RVAR) at the same time
from PRESET 1 to PRESET 3 while CC ON remains active.
as the PTO incrementing signal (Set, Resume)
NOTE 2: A combination of ON, RVAR or RPRE with SET will select PRESET 1. A combination
of ON, RVAR, or RPRE with RESUME will select PRESET 2.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
0 - Service Brake Disables Remote Pedal Switch
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75201 7520 Allows operator to set the Service Brake to disable the Remote PTO. 1 - Service Brake Does Not Change Remote Pedal 0
RP with Service Brake
Switch
Allows the use of PTO without requiring the parking brake set.
Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Parking Brake Disables Remote Pedal Switch
RP with Parking Brake 75211 7521 1 - Parking Brake Does Not Change Remote Pedal 0
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control (Continued)

NOTE: Depending on the calibration; some calibrations have the Parking Brake interactions with
Released Switch
Remote PTO disabled permanently.
Allows the use of Remote PTO without requiring the Driveline Status indicate "driveline
disengaged".
0 - Driveline Status Disables Remote Pedal Switch
Aux Throttle Control - Disable NOTE: For Automatic transmissions, "Driveline Status" refers to the gear selector; moving the
75221 7522 1 - Driveline Status Does Not Change Remote Pedal 1
RP with Driveline Status gear selector from the Park/ Neutral position will cancel the current Remote PTO mode. For
Switch
Manual transmissions, "Driveline Status" refers to the clutch switch or gear selector status;
pressing the clutch or moving the gear selector from "Neutral" will cancel the current Remote
PTO mode.
0 - In-Cab Controls Disables Remote Pedal Switch
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75231 7523 Allows operator to disable the RP with In-Cab Controls. 1 - In-Cab Controls Do Not Change Remote Change 1
RP with In-Cab Controls
Remote Pedal Switch
0 - Vehicle Speed Limit Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable Switch
75241 7524 Allows Remote PTO to be disabled with vehicle speed. 0
RP with Vehicle Speed 1 - Vehicle Speed Limit Does Not Change Remote
Pedal Switch
Allows the operator to enable or disable RP overrides.
Aux Throttle Control - Enable 0 - Disable
75251 7525 0
RP Overrides 1 - Enable
*If this is 0, all interlock overrides are disabled.
Aux Throttle Control - Enable 0 - Disable the In-Cab PTO overrides
75261 7526 Allows the operator to enable or disable In-Cab PTO overrides. 0
ATC 1 - Enable the In-Cab PTO overrides
Min. Cruise Control Vehicle
Control

76031 7603 Minimum vehicle speed at which cruise control can be engaged. 25 100 MPH 35
Cruise

Speed
Max. Cruise Control Vehicle
76041 7604 Maximum road speed at which the cruise will control the vehicle speed. 30 127 MPH 60
Speed
0 - Standard Warning (Overspeed)
Determines how the EWPS Feature reacts if critical engine operating limits are exceeded. If set 1 - 3-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low Oil
Engine Warning and
Protection System

to: Pressure, Low Coolant)


1 - The EWPS feature provides a visual and audible indication if critical engine operating limits 2 - 3-way Protection (Overspeed, Overheat, Low Oil
exceed a threshold. Pressure, Low Coolant)
Engine Warning And Engine Group
77002 7700 2 - The EWPS feature provides 2 levels of protection. 3 - 2-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low Oil
Protection System Mode Suggested
(Less Severe) - A visual and audible indication occurs if critical engine operating parameters Pressure)
exceed the 1st threshold. 4 - 4-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low Oil
(More Severe) - The EWPS feature will shut down the engine if critical engine operating Pressure, Genset Speed Control)
parameters exceed the 2nd threshold. 5 - 2-way Protection (Overspeed, Overheat, Low Oil
Pressure)

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-13


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-14
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Road Speed Limiting Control 0 - Disable
79001 7900 Required to be set to 1. 1
Mode 1 - Enable
Vehicle Speed

Sets the maximum engine speed allowed when an active vehicle speed sensor (VSS) fault exits
Governor

Engine Speed
and PTO engine speed control is not active. This parameter might be useful in preventing the
Limit with VSS 79011 7901 700 5000 RPM 2200
operator from exceeding the Max Vehicle Speed with Road Speed Limiting On (7902)
Fault
parameter setting by tampering with the vehicle speed sensor.
Max Vehicle Speed with Road
Sets the maximum accelerator controlled vehicle speed. The engine will not power the vehicle
Speed 79021 7902 1 99 MPH 60
faster than this value. This parameter can be used to encourage driver behavior.
Limiting On
Should be enabled if the vehicle is equipped with a 2-speed axle.
0 - Disable
Two Speed Axle Enable 80001 8000
1 - Enable
NOTE: This parameter can be used for a transfer case enable.
Tire Revs Per Mile 80011 8001 This value is provided by the tire manufacturer and is used in the vehicle speed calculation. 300 676 RPM

This is the application specific final drive gear ratio.

NOTE 1: This is a “low speed” gear ratio if equipped with a 2-speed axle.
Rear Axle Ratio Low 80020 8002 2.50 30.00
NOTE 2: If equipped with a single speed axle, then parameter (8002) and (8003) must be
programmed to the same value.
Vehicle Setup

This is the application specific final drive gear ratio.

NOTE 1: This is a “high speed” gear ratio if equipped with a 2-speed axle. Sales Tools Driven
Rear Axle Ratio High 80030 8003 2.50 30.00
NOTE 2: If equipped with a single speed axle, then parameter (8002) and (8003) must be
programmed to the same value.
Transmission Top Gear Ratio 80041 8004 The gear ratio of the highest gear in the transmission. 0.6 20
Indicates the low axle ratio pulses per mile (PPM). This is found by multiplying the following:
Low Axle Ratio Pulses Per
80051 8005 [Tire Revs Per Mile (8001) x Rear Axle Ratio Low (8002) x Transmission Tailshaft GearTeeth 18,017 200,000 PPM
Mile Count
(8007)]

High Axle Ratio Pulses Per Indicates the high axle ratio PPM. This is found by multiplying the following: [Tire Revs Per Mile
80061 8006 18,017 200,000 PPM
Mile Count (8001) x Rear Axle Ratio Low (8002) x Transmission Tailshaft GearTeeth (8007)]

Transmission Tailshaft Gear


80071 8007 Indicates the number of teeth on the transmission output or transfer case shaft. 5 255
Teeth
Low Idle Engine Speed 82020 8202 The engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) at normal low engine idle speed. 650 750 RPM
Protection
Password

Customer Password 87002 8700 The password locks the parameters so they cannot be changed without the password. Up to 8 Alphanumeric characters required. 0000
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Determines the functionality of the Engine Fan Control (EFC) feature. If set to: 0 - Disable
0 - Trans Mounted
Engine Fan Control Mode 90001 9000 1 - The feature includes: 1. Cooling fan turns ON at 100% and OFF based on engine coolant 1 - ON/OFF Coolant Temp Control
1 - Split Shaft
temperature. 2 - ON/OFF Temp Control Retarder
Sets the engine coolant temperature threshold for engine fan ON command; when the Engine
Fan ON Temperature for Coolant Temperature (ECT) exceeds this threshold, the fan will turn ON.
90021 9002 -40 302 F 212°F
Engine Fan Control

Engine Cooling Control WARNING: Changing of this parameter may have an adverse effect on the engine life if done
improperly.
Sets the engine coolant temperature threshold for engine fan OFF command; when the ECT
Fan OFF Temperature for drops below this threshold, the fan will turn OFF.
90031 9003 -40 302 F 204°F
Engine Cooling Control WARNING: Changing of this parameter may have an adverse effect on the engine life if done
improperly.
Sets the minimum time the fan will remain ON at each activation if the fan has been cycled ON-
Total Time Fan Duty Cycle
90181 9018 OFF-ON too frequently. This is to protect the fan drive lining from wear and tear due to 0 120 SEC 30
Protection is Enabled
excessive and rapid fan cycling.
Extended Fan On Time During
90191 9019 Sets the period of time where the extended fan ON time parameter (9018) is in effect. 120 1800 SEC 120
Fan Duty Cycle Protection

Sets the driveline mode for PTO operation: If set to:


0 - The ECM receives vehicle speed via SAE J1939 or hardwired from the transmission output
shaft - vehicle speed sensor input.
1 - And the transfer case is engaged, the ECM receives wheel-based vehicle speed via SAE
Driveline Status for Hydraulic J1939 from the anti-lock brake system (ABS). 0 - Neutral Operation 0 - Trans Mounted
PTO - Split Shaft Operation

93011 9301
Pressure Governor Operation 1 - Split Shaft Operation 1 - Split Shaft
NOTE 1: The driveline must be disengaged at all times for operation of the split shaft feature.
NOTE 2: A transition in driveline status will cause the split shaft feature to be deactivated.

*Only for split shaft which is not typical.

Allows the operator to select the vehicle speed display. If set to:
0 - The ECM will transmit vehicle speed to the cluster based on the SAE J1939 output from the
anti- lock brake system (ABS), the speedometer will not display a vehicle speed unless the
Vehicle Speed Source vehicle wheels are rotating. 0 - Wheel speed selected when split shaft is enabled
0 - Trans Mounted
Selection When Split Shaft is 93071 9307 1 - The ECM will transmit vehicle speed to the cluster based on the signal from the transmission 1 - Output shaft speed selected when split shaft is
1 - Split Shaft
Active output shaft speed sensor, the speedometer will display a vehicle speed while the split shaft enabled
mode is operational based on the output shaft speed.

*Only for split shaft, which is not typical.


Enables the Cold Ambient Protection functionality.
Protection
Ambient

0 - Disable
Cold

Cold Ambient Protection


94001 9400 NOTE: Low and High idle speeds are non-adjustable. 1 - Enable 0
Enable
*Disabled as it would interfere with PTO operation.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-15


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-16
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Enables or disables the service interval feature. If set to:
0 - Disable
Service Interval Mode 95001 9500 0 - The service interval feature is disabled. 1
1 - Enable
1 - The feature will turn on the “Change Engine Oil” indication if the service interval has expired.

Determines the fuel used between the last service interval reset and when the “Change Engine
Oil” indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value recommended in the “Maintenance
Fuel Used Service
95011 9501 Schedule and Service Procedures” section of the “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”. 0 65,535 GAL 1500
Interval
NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if a service interval based on fuel used is not desired.

Determines the engine hours between the last service interval reset and when the "Change
Engine Oil" indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value recommended in the
"Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures" section of the "Engine Operation and
Engine Hour Service Interval 95021 9502 0 2000 HRS 450
Maintenance Manual".

NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if a service interval based on engine hours is not desired.

Determines the vehicle distance between the last service interval reset and when the "Change
Engine Oil" indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value recommended in the
Vehicle Distance Service "Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures" section of the "Engine Operation and
95031 9503 0 65,535 GAL 12000
Interval Maintenance Manual".
Service Interval

NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if a service interval based on vehicle distance is not desired.

This parameter is used to create an offset; the Service Interval -fuel used accumulator will not
Fuel Used Starting Value 95041 9504 0 536,870,911 GAL 0
begin to increment until reaching this value.
This parameter is used to create an offset; the Service Interval - engine hour accumulator will
Engine Hour Starting Value 95051 9505 0 214,748,364 HRS 0
not begin to increment until reaching this value.
Vehicle Distance Starting This parameter is used to create an offset; the Service Interval - vehicle distance accumulator
95061 9506 0 4,294,967,295 MILES 0
Value will not begin to increment until reaching this value.
Determines the functionality of the “Change Engine Oil” indication. If this parameter is set to
100%, the “Change Engine Oil” indication will occur when one or more intervals (hours, fuel, or
distance) have fully expired. If the value is set to 50%, however; the "Change Engine Oil"
Service Soon Percent 95071 9507 indication occurs when half of the interval has accumulated. 5 100 % 0

NOTE: Refer to the "calculations" section and the examples at the end of this document to
understand how to set this parameter.
Set this parameter to a value of 1 to ensure the change oil lamp
Change Oil Lamp 0 - No
95081 9508 will turn on and remain on once the oil change service interval has 0
Always On 1 - Yes
expired.
Set this parameter to a value of 1 to reset the service interval and
turn off the "Change Engine Oil" indication.
Service Interval 0 - No
95101 9510 0
Reset Request NOTE: The service interval may be reset by means of the cruise 1 - Yes
control switches. Refer to the Service Interval Reset section in this document for more
information.
Engine Parameters for Loader and Rear Packer - MaxxForce Engines DT, 9 and 10
This information is designed to be a guideline in setting up the parameters for a specific application and is not all-encompassing.
Email Questions or Concerns to performanceengineering@navistar.com

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
0 - Disable
Determines the conditions under which the engine brake feature will be functional. 1 - Exhaust Brake Latched
If set to: 2 - Exhaust Brake Coast
0 - The engine brake functionality is disabled. 3 - Transmission Brake Latched
1, 3 or 4 - The engine brake is active after the accelerator pedal is released. 4 - Compression Brake Latched
Vehicle Retarder Control 2 or 5 - The engine brake is active only while the service brake pedal is pressed. 5 - Compression Brake Coast
Engine Brake

70003 7000 2
Mode 6 - The engine brake is active when the accelerator pedal is released and cruise 6 - Compression Brake with Cruise Control
mode is active; in this model, the engine brake acts to maintain a set speed 7 - Exhaust Brake with Cruise Control
(typically when traveling down a grade).
NOTE: Mode 7 is not functional for Inline
*Engine brake not allowed in a community area. If needed, select option 2. applications but may show up in the
Programming/ Service Tool.
Allows the VRE to be disabled when the Remote Throttle is in use.
0 - Enable VRE Control
VRE Disable when RPS Active 70091 7009 1 - Disable VRE Control when Remote Throttle Customer Chosen
*Only a concern if there is a possibility that engine braking may interfere with remote
is active
throttle.

Determines the conditions under which the idle shutdown feature will be functional.
If set to:
0 - The idle shutdown timer is disabled.
1 - The idle shutdown timer sequence will be prevented and the engine will not shut
down while the PTO or any auxiliary engine speeds control is actively ramping the
engine above normal engine idle speed.
2 - The engine may shutdown if PTO engine speed control is engaged. This allows 0 - Disable
the engine to stay running, for example, if the operator desires to have the engine 1 - PTO Option
Idle Shutdown Timer Mode 74001 7400 0
speed ramped up during PTO operation. This mode also prevents the operator from 2 - No Load Option
setting the engine speed with a minimum load (e.g., 10% engine torque) without 3 - Tamper Proofing Option
actually engaging the PTO with the intent of bypassing the idle shutdown timer.
3 - The engine may shutdown if PTO engine speed control is engaged. Puts the
Idle Shutdown Timer

feature in tamper proofing mode. Refer to the tamper proofing section for more
information.

*California vehicles receive a 1. All others receive a 0.

Sets the amount of engine idle time before the idle shutdown feature will initiate an
engine shutdown.

Engine Idle Shutdown Time 74010 7401 NOTE: While the Electronic Service Tool is installed, this time may be extended 2 120 MIN 5
regardless of the parameter setting.

*If your in PTO operation mode, this will not start counting.

Engine Idle Shutdown The Idle Shutdown feature will not shut down the engine above this temperature.
Maximum Intake Air 74021 7402 This allows the engine to stay running when temperatures are high in order to allow -40 302 F 100°F
Temperature the air conditioning to function for driver comfort, for example.

The Idle Shutdown feature will not shut down the engine below this temperature.
Engine Idle Shutdown
This allows the engine to stay running when temperatures are low in order to allow
Minimum Intake Air 74031 7403 -40 302 F 45°F
the engine to stay warm for engine protection, and to allow the heater to function for
Temperature
driver comfort, for example.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-17


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-18
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Parameters for Preset Engine Speed PTO Configuration

Determines the conditions that the Engine Speed Control (PTO) feature will be
functional. Set this parameter to enable PTO operation and to choose which inputs
are used for control. If set to:
0 - The PTO functionality is disabled.
1 - Only the remote PTO inputs will be able to control PTO (See NOTE 2). 0 - Disable
Aux Throttle Control - 2 - Only the in-cab inputs will be able to control PTO. 1 - Remote Operation Only
75001 7500 1
l-Mode 3 - Both remote and in-cab inputs will be able to control PTO (See NOTE 1 & 2). 2 - In-Cab Operation Only
3 - Remote and In-Cab Operation
NOTE 1: The last input received will take priority when Mode 3 is selected.

NOTE 2: Mode 1 and the remote portion of Mode 3 are discussed in the Remote
Engine Speed Control document.

The maximum vehicle speed that the PTO will be allowed to operate.
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE: Set this parameter to the maximum vehicle speed that the PTO is typically
75011 7501 0 20 MPH 3
Maximum Vehicle Speed used.

*Only applicable if in mobile variable mode for any speed above 0 mph.

Set this parameter after selecting In-Cab Or Remote and In-Cab Operation to
determine which PTO mode is active. If set to:
0 - The switches will not be used. Refer to the Remote Engine Speed Control
document.
0 - None
1 - The switches will be used to select up to 6 preset engine speeds. Refer to the
Aux Throttle Control B26 - 1 - Stationary Preset
75021 7502 Stationary Preset section for more information. 0
In-Cab Mode 2 - Stationary Variable
2 - The switches will be used to adjust the engine speed variably. Refer to the
3 - Mobile Variable
Stationary Variable section for more information.
3 - The switches will be used to adjust the engine speed to a desired set point to
allow for vehicle movement. Refer to the Mobile Variable section for more
information.

Select this parameter when accelerator, brake or clutch is desired to be ignored


during engine speed control operation. If set to:
0 - The accelerator, brake, and clutch are inputs used for PTO operation.
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - Disable
75031 7503 1 - The accelerator, brake, and clutch will be ignored during PTO operation. 0
In-Cab Operator Interface 1 - Enable
NOTE: Use parameters (7510), (7511) and (7513) to provide the specific input
options.
Sets the driveline mode for PTO operation:
Aux Throttle Control - Remote 0 - Disable
75041 7504 0
Pedal Enable 1 - Enable
NOTE: Set to 1 if engine speed is to be controlled by remote throttle pedal.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Sets the running engine speed point that will be maintained when the first PTO
preset speed is selected or when SET/ COAST is pressed.
Aux Throttle Control - Preset
NOTE: Preset speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
Engine Speed 1 75051 7505 1000
Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
(SET/COAST)
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

Sets the running engine speed point that will be maintained when the second PTO
preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed.
Aux Throttle Control - Preset
NOTE: Preset speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
Engine Speed 2 75061 7506 1000
Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
(RESUME/ACCEL)
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control (Continued)

value). 1, 3, 5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

Sets the speed at which the engine will attempt to increase the engine speed.

NOTE 1: The engine only attempts to increase the engine speed at this rate
because actual engine changes are influenced by other factors such as engine load
Aux Throttle Control - and available engine power.
75071 7507 1 1500 RPM 500 RPM/SEC
Ramp Rate
NOTE 2: This parameter should be set to provide a smooth transition to the desired
engine speed to accommodate applicable PTO equipment.

*7507 is only active when variable modes are selected in 7502.

The maximum engine speed that can be reached using any PTO controls.
Aux Throttle Control -
75081 7508 2200
Maximum Engine Speed
NOTE: This parameter must be set properly to protect PTO related equipment.

Sets the running engine speed point that will be maintained when the third PTO
preset speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed twice.

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE: Preset speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
75091 7509 1000
Preset Engine Speed 3 Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

Sets the running engine speed point that will be maintained when the fourth PTO
preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed twice.

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE: Preset speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
75101 7510 1000
Preset Engine Speed 4 Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-19


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-20
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Sets the running engine speed point that will be maintained when the fifth PTO
preset speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed three times.

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE: Preset speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
75111 7511 1000
Preset Engine Speed 5 Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

Sets the running engine speed point that will be maintained when the sixth PTO
preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed three times.

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE: Preset speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
75121 7512 1000
Preset Engine Speed 6 Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control (Continued)

value). 1, 3, 5 can be one preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.


Parameters for PTO Override Configurations
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - Return to Zero Required
75131 7513 Sets the return to zero requirements for the Remote Pedal. 1
Return to Zero 1 - Return to Zero Not Required
Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Service Brake Disables PTO
75141 7514 Allows the operator to set the Service Brake to disable the In-Cab PTO. 0
ATC with Service Brake 1 - Service Brake Does Not Change PTO

Allows the use of PTO without requiring the parking brake set.
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
0 - Parking Brake Disables PTO
ATC with Parking Brake 75151 7515 0
NOTE: Depending on the calibration; some calibrations have the Parking Brake 1 - Parking Brake Does Not Change PTO
Released
interactions with PTO disabled permanently.
0 - Driveline Status Disables PTO operation
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75161 7516 (7517) Allows the operator to disable the ATC with In-Cab Controls. 1 - Driveline Status Does Not Change PTO 0
ATC with Driveline Status
operation
Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - In- Cab Controls Disables PTO
75171 7517 Control - Disable ATC with In-Cab Controls 0
ATC with In-Cab Controls 1 - In- Cab controls Do Not Change PTO

Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Vehicle Speed Limit Disables PTO


75181 7518 Allows the In-Cab PTO to be disabled with vehicle speed. 0
ATC with Vehicle Speed 1 - Vehicle Speed Limit Does Not Change PTO

Allows the operator to use a single switch to activate PTO PRESET 1 or 2.


0 - Disable the ability to activate the PTO
NOTE 1: After PTO/ RPTO has been enabled, PTO and/ or RPTO will require a enable signal (CC/PTO On, RPRE, RVAR) at
transition in the state of the PTO control switches (CC RESUME/SET, or RVAR/ the same time as the PTO incrementing signal
RPRE switches) to transition to a new PRESET mode from the current state. For (SET, RESUME)
Aux Throttle Control -
75191 7519 example, a transition in the state of the PTO control switches would require a 1
SPDT Enable
release of the CC SET switch then re-activation to transition from PRESET 1 to 1 - Enable the ability to activate the PTO
PRESET 3 while CC ON remains active. enable signal (CC/PTO On, RPRE, RVAR) at
the same time as the PTO incrementing signal
NOTE 2: A combination of ON, RVAR or RPRE with SET will select PRESET 1. A (SET, RESUME)
combination of ON, RVAR, or RPRE with RESUME will select PRESET 2.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
0 - Service Brake Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75201 7520 Allows the operator to set the Service Brake to disable the Remote PTO. Switch 0
RP with Service Brake
1 - Service Brake Does Not Change Remote
Allows the use of PTO without requiring the parking brake set. 0 - Parking Brake Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
Switch
PTO - In-Cab Engine Speed Control (Continued)

RP with Parking Brake 75211 7521 0


NOTE: Depending on the calibration; some calibrations have the Parking Brake 1 - Parking Brake Does Not Change Remote
Released
interactions with Remote PTO disabled permanently. Pedal Switch

Allows the use of Remote PTO without requiring the Driveline Status to indicate
"Driveline Disengaged".
0 - Driveline Status Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable NOTE: For Automatic transmissions, "Driveline Status" refers to the gear selector; Switch
75221 7522 0
RP with Driveline Status moving the gear selector from the Park/ Neutral position will cancel the current 1 - Driveline Status Does Not Change Remote
Remote PTO mode. For Manual transmissions, "Driveline Status" refers to the Pedal Switch
clutch switch or gear selector status; pressing the clutch or moving the gear selector
from "Neutral" will cancel the current Remote PTO mode.
0 - In-Cab Controls Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75231 7523 Allows the operator to disable the RP with In-Cab Controls. Switch 0
RP with In-Cab Controls
1 - In-Cab Controls Do Not Change Remote
0 - Vehicle Speed Limit Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75241 7524 Allows Remote PTO to be disabled with vehicle speed. Switch 0
RP with Vehicle Speed
1 - Vehicle Speed Limit Does Not Change
Allows the operator to enable or disable RP overrides.
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - Disable
75251 7525 0
Enable RP Overrides 1 - Enable
*If this is 0, all interlock overrides are disabled.
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - Disable the In-Cab PTO overrides
75261 7526 Allows the operator to enable or disable In-Cab PTO overrides. 0
Enable ATC 1 - Enable the In-Cab PTO overrides
Min. Cruise Control
Control

76031 7603 Minimum vehicle speed at which cruise control can be engaged. 25 100 MPH 35
Cruise

Vehicle Speed
Max. Cruise Control
76041 7604 Maximum road speed at which the cruise will control the vehicle speed. 30 127 MPH 63
Vehicle Speed
0 - Standard Warning (Overspeed)
1 - 3-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low
Determines how the EWPS Feature reacts if critical engine operating limits are
Engine Warning and
Protection System

Oil Pressure, Low Coolant)


exceeded. If set to:
2 - 3-way Protection (Overspeed, Overheat,
1 - The EWPS feature provides a visual and audible indication if critical engine
Low Oil Pressure, Low Coolant)
Engine Warning and operating limits exceed a threshold.
77002 7700 3 - 2-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low 1
Protection System Mode 2 - The EWPS feature provides 2 levels of protection. Less Severe – A visual and
Oil Pressure)
audible indication occurs if critical engine operating parameters exceed the 1st
4 - 4-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low
threshold. More Severe – The EWPS feature will shut down the engine if critical
Oil Pressure, Genset Speed Control)
engine operating parameters exceed the 2nd threshold.
5 - 2-way Protection (Overspeed, Overheat,
Low Oil Pressure)

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-21


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-22
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Road Speed Limiting 0 - Disable
79001 7900 This parameter is required to be set to 1. 1
Control Mode 1 - Enable
Vehicle Speed Governor

Sets the maximum engine speed allowed when an active vehicle speed sensor
(VSS) fault exits and PTO engine speed control is not active. This parameter might
Engine Speed
79011 7901 be useful in preventing the operator from exceeding the Max Vehicle Speed with 700 5000 RPM 2200
Limit with VSS Fault
Road Speed Limiting On (7902) parameter setting by tampering with the vehicle
speed sensor.
Sets the maximum accelerator controlled vehicle speed. The engine will not power
Max Vehicle Speed with Road
79021 7902 the vehicle faster than this value. This parameter can be used to encourage driver 1 99 MPH 63
Speed Limiting On
behavior.
0-Disabled
PTO - Vehicle Speed Override 75181 7518 If the PTO is engaged, this is the allowable speed the PTO will be able to operate. 1
1- Enabled
This parameter should be enabled if the vehicle is equipped with a 2-speed axle.
0 - Disable
Two Speed Axle Enable 80001 8000
1 - Enable
NOTE: This parameter can be used for a transfer case enable.

This value is provided by the tire manufacturer and is used in the vehicle speed
Tire Revs Per Mile 80011 8001 300 676 RPM
calculation
This is the application specific final drive gear ratio.

NOTE 1: This is a “low speed” gear ratio if equipped with a 2-speed axle.
Rear Axle Ratio Low 80020 8002 2.50 30.00
NOTE 2: If equipped with a single speed axle, then parameter (8002) and (8003)
must be programmed to the same value.
Vehicle Setup

This is the application specific final drive gear ratio.

NOTE 1: This is a “high speed” gear ratio if equipped with a 2-speed axle. Sales Tools Driven
Rear Axle Ratio High 80030 8003 2.50 30.00
NOTE 2: If equipped with a single speed axle, then parameter (8002) and (8003)
must be programmed to the same value.

Transmission Top Gear Ratio 80041 8004 The gear ratio of the highest gear in the transmission. 0.6 20
Indicates the low axle ratio pulses per mile (PPM). This is found by multiplying the
Low Axle Ratio Pulses Per
80051 8005 following: [Tire Revs Per Mile (8001) x Rear Axle Ratio Low (8002) x Transmission 18,017 200,000 PPM
Mile Count
Tailshaft Gear Teeth (8007)]
Indicates the high axle ratio PPM. This is found by multiplying the following: [Tire
High Axle Ratio Pulses Per
80061 8006 Revs Per Mile (8001) x Rear Axle Ratio Low (8002) x Transmission Tailshaft Gear 18,017 200,000 PPM
Mile Count
Teeth (8007)]
Transmission Tailshaft
80071 8007 Indicates the number of teeth on the transmission output or transfer case shaft. 5 255
Gear Teeth
Low Idle Engine Speed 82020 8202 The engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) at normal low engine idle speed. 650 750 RPM
Protection
Password

The password locks the parameters so they cannot be changed without the
Customer Password 87002 8700 Up to 8 Alphanumeric characters required. 0000
password.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Chosen based on
0 - Disable
Determines the functionality of the Engine Fan Control (EFC) feature. If set to: the fan type
Engine Fan Control Mode 90001 9000 1 - ON/OFF Coolant Temp Control
1 - Cooling fan turns ON at 100% and OFF based on engine coolant temperature. installed on the
2 - ON/OFF Temp Control Retarder
vehicle.
Sets the engine coolant temperature threshold for engine fan ON command; when
Fan ON Temperature for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) exceeds this threshold, the fan will turn ON.
Engine Fan Control

90021 9002 -40 302 F 212°F


Engine Cooling Control WARNING: Changing of this parameter may have an adverse effect on the engine
life if done improperly.

Sets the engine coolant temperature threshold for engine fan OFF command; when
Fan OFF Temperature for
90031 9003 the ECT drops below this threshold, the fan will turn OFF. WARNING: Changing of -40 302 F 204°F
Engine Cooling Control
this parameter may have an adverse effect on the engine life if done improperly.
Sets the minimum time the fan will remain ON at each activation if the fan has been
Total Time Fan Duty Cycle
90181 9018 cycled ON-OFF-ON too frequently. This is to protect the fan drive lining from wear 0 120 SEC 30
Protection is Enabled
and tear due to excessive and rapid fan cycling.
Extended Fan On Time During Sets the period of time where the extended fan ON time parameter (9018) is in
90191 9019 120 1800 SEC 120
Fan Duty Cycle Protection effect.
Sets the driveline mode for PTO operation: If set to
0 - The ECM receives vehicle speed via SAE J1939 or hardwired from the
transmission output shaft - vehicle speed sensor input.
1 - and the transfer case is engaged – The ECM receives wheel-based vehicle
speed via SAE J1939 from the anti-lock brake system (ABS).
Driveline Status for Hydraulic 0 - Neutral Operation
93011 9301 0
PTO - Split Shaft Operation

Pressure Governor Operation NOTE 1: The driveline must be disengaged at all times for operation of the split 1 - Split Shaft Operation
shaft feature.
NOTE 2: A transition in driveline status will cause the split shaft feature to be
deactivated.

*Only for split shaft which is not typical.

Allows the operator to select the vehicle speed display. If set to:
0 - The ECM will transmit vehicle speed to the cluster based on the SAE J1939
output from the anti- lock brake system (ABS), the speedometer will not display a
0 - Wheel speed selected when split shaft is
Vehicle Speed Source vehicle speed unless the vehicle wheels are rotating.
enabled
Selection When Split Shaft is 93071 9307 1 - The ECM will transmit vehicle speed to the cluster based on the signal from the 0
1 - Output shaft speed selected when split shaft
Active transmission output shaft speed sensor, the speedometer will display a vehicle
is enabled
speed while the split shaft mode is operational based on the output shaft speed.

*Only for split shaft which is not typical.


Cold Ambient

This parameter enables the Cold Ambient Protection functionality.


Protection

Cold Ambient Protection


94001 9400 NOTE: Low and High idle speeds are non-adjustable. 0 - Disable 0
Enable
1 - Enable
*Disabled as it would interfere with PTO operation.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-23


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-24
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
This parameter enables or disables the service interval feature. • If set to (0): – The
0 - Disable
Service Interval Mode 95001 9500 service interval feature is disabled. • If set to (1): – The feature will turn on the 0
1 - Enable
“Change Engine Oil” indication if the service interval has expired.

Determines the fuel used between the last service interval reset and when the
“Change Engine Oil” indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value
Fuel Used Service recommended in the “Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures” section of
95011 9501 0 65,535 GAL 1500
Interval the “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”.

NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if a service interval based on fuel used is not desired.

Determines the engine hours between the last service interval reset and when the
“Change Engine Oil” indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value
recommended in the “Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures” section of
Engine Hour Service Interval 95021 9502 the “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”. 0 2000 HRS 450

NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if a service interval based on engine hours is not
desired.

Determines the vehicle distance between the last service interval reset and when
the “Change Engine Oil” indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value
recommended in the “Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures” section of
Vehicle Distance Service
95031 9503 the “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”. 0 65,535 GAL 12000
Interval
Service Interval

NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if a service interval based on vehicle distance is not
desired.
Used to create an offset; the Service Interval - fuel used accumulator will not begin
Fuel Used Starting Value 95041 9504 0 536,870,911 GAL 0
to increment until reaching this value.
Used to create an offset; the Service Interval - engine hour accumulator will not
Engine Hour Starting Value 95051 9505 0 214,748,364 HRS 0
begin to increment until reaching this value.
Vehicle Distance Used to create an offset; the Service Interval - vehicle distance accumulator will not
95061 9506 0 4,294,967,295 MILES 0
Starting Value begin to increment until reaching this value.
Determines the functionality of the “Change Engine Oil” indication. If this parameter
is set to:
100% - the “Change Engine Oil” indication will occur when one or more intervals
(hours, fuel, or distance) have fully expired.
Service Soon Percent 95071 9507 50% - however; the “Change Engine Oil” indication occurs when half of the interval 5 100 % 0
has accumulated.

NOTE: Refer to the “calculations” section and the examples at the end of this
document to understand how to set this parameter.

Set this parameter to:


Change Oil Lamp 0 - No
95081 9508 1 to ensure the change oil lamp will turn on and remain on once the oil change 0
Always On 1 - Yes
service interval has expired.
Set this parameter to:
1 to reset the service interval and turn off the “Change Engine Oil” indication.
Service Interval 0 - No
95101 9510 0
Reset Request NOTE: The service interval may be reset by means of the cruise 1 - Yes
control switches. Refer to the Service Interval Reset section in this document for
more information.
Engine Parameters for Rollback Recovery - MaxxForce Engines DT, 9 and 10
This information is designed to be a guideline in setting up the parameters for a specific application and is not all-encompassing.
Email Questions or Concerns to performanceengineering@navistar.com

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
0 - Disable
1 - Exhaust Brake Latched
2 - Exhaust Brake Coast
Determines the conditions that the engine brake feature will be functional. If set to:
3 - Transmission Brake Latched
0 - The engine brake functionality is disabled. 0
4 - Compression Brake Latched
1, 3 or 4 - The engine brake is active after the accelerator pedal is released.
5 - Compression Brake Coast
Engine Brake

Vehicle Retarder Control Mode 70003 7000 2 or 5 - the engine brake is active only while the service brake pedal is pressed. *Customer chosen
6 - Compression Brake with Cruise Control
6 - The engine brake is active when the accelerator pedal is released and cruise based on installed
7 - Exhaust Brake with Cruise Control
mode is active; in this mode, the engine brake acts to maintain a set speed (typically brake.
when traveling down a grade).
NOTE: Mode 7 is not functional for inline
applications but may show up in the
Programming/ Service Tool.
Allows the VRE to be disabled when the Remote Throttle is in use.
0 - Enable VRE Control
VRE Disable when RPS Active 70091 7009 1 - Disable VRE Control when Remote Throttle Customer Chosen
*Only a concern if there is a possibility that engine braking may interfere with remote
is active
throttle.

Determines the conditions under which the idle shutdown feature will be functional. If
set to:
0 - The idle shutdown timer is disabled.
1 - The idle shutdown timer sequence will be prevented and the engine will not shut
down while the PTO or any auxiliary engine speeds control is actively ramping the
engine above normal engine idle speed. 0 - Disable
2 - The engine may shutdown if PTO engine speed control is engaged. This allows 1 - PTO Option
Idle Shutdown Timer Mode 74001 7400 1
the engine to stay running, for example, if the operator desires to have the engine 2 - No Load Option
speed ramped up during PTO operation. This mode also prevents the operator from 3 - Tamper Proofing Option
setting the engine speed with a minimum load (e.g., 10% engine torque) without
actually engaging the PTO with the intent of bypassing the idle shutdown timer.
Idle Shutdown Timer

3 - The engine may shutdown if PTO engine speed control is engaged. Puts the
feature in tamper proofing mode. Refer to the tamper proofing section for more
information.

Sets the amount of engine idle time before the idle shutdown feature will initiate an
engine shutdown.

Engine Idle Shutdown Time 74010 7401 NOTE: While the Electronic Service Tool is installed, this time may be extended 2 120 MIN 15
regardless of the parameter setting.

*If in PTO operation mode, this will not start counting.

Engine Idle Shutdown The idle shutdown feature will not shut down the engine above this temperature. This
Maximum Intake Air 74021 7402 allows the engine to stay running when temperatures are high in order to allow the air -40 302 F 100°F
Temperature conditioning to function for driver comfort, for example.
The idle shutdown feature will not shut down the engine below this temperature. This
Engine Idle Shutdown
allows the engine to stay running when temperatures are low in order to allow the
Minimum Intake Air 74031 7403 -40 302 F 45°F
engine to stay warm for engine protection, and to allow the heater to function for
Temperature
driver comfort, for example.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-25


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-26
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Parameters for Preset Engine Speed PTO Configuration
Determines the conditions that the Engine Speed Control (PTO) feature will be
functional. Set this parameter to enable PTO operation and to choose which inputs
are used for control. If set to:
0 - The PTO functionality is disabled.
1 - Only the remote PTO inputs will be able to control PTO (See NOTE 2). 0 - Disable
Aux Throttle Control - 2 - Only the in-cab inputs will be able to control PTO. 1 - Remote Operation Only
75001 7500 3
l-Mode 3 - Both remote and in-cab inputs will be able to control PTO (See NOTE 1 & 2). 2 - In-Cab Operation Only
3 - Remote and In-Cab Operation
NOTE 1: The last input received will take priority when Mode 3 is selected.

NOTE 2: Mode 1 and the remote portion of Mode 3 are discussed in the Remote
Engine Speed Control document.
This parameter is the maximum vehicle speed that the PTO will be allowed to
PTO In Cab - Engine Speed Control

operate.
Aux Throttle Control -
75011 7501 NOTE: Set this parameter to the maximum vehicle speed that the PTO is typically 0 20 MPH 2
Maximum Vehicle Speed
used.

*Only applicable if in mobile variable mode for any speed above 0 MPH.

Set this parameter after selecting In-Cab Or Remote and In-Cab Operation to
determine which PTO mode is active. If set to:
0 – The switches will not be used. Refer to the Remote Engine Speed Control
document. 0 - None
Aux Throttle Control B26 - 1 – The switches will be used to select up to 6 preset engine speeds. Refer to the 1 - Stationary Preset
75021 7502 1
In-Cab Mode Stationary Preset section for more information. 2 - Stationary Variable
2 – The switches will be used to adjust the engine speed variably. Refer to the 3 - Mobile Variable
Stationary Variable section for more information.
3 – The switches will be used to adjust the engine speed to a desired set point to
allow for vehicle movement. Refer to the Mobile Variable section for more information.

Select this parameter when accelerator, brake or clutch is desired to be ignored


during engine speed control operation. If set to:
0 - The accelerator, brake, and clutch are inputs used for PTO operation.
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - Disable
75031 7503 1 - The accelerator, brake, and clutch will be ignored during PTO operation. 0
In-Cab Operator Interface 1 - Enable
NOTE: Use parameters (7510), (7511) and (7513) to provide the specific input
options.
This parameter sets the driveline mode for PTO operation:
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - Disable
75041 7504 0
Remote Pedal Enable 1 - Enable
NOTE: Set to 1 if engine speed is to be controlled by remote throttle pedal.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
This parameter sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when
the first (1st) PTO preset speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
Preset Engine Speed 1 75051 7505 1000
Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
(SET/COAST)
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the second
(2nd) PTO preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed.
Aux Throttle Control -
NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
Preset Engine Speed 2 75061 7506 1200
Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
(RESUME/ACCEL)
*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
PTO In Cab - Engine Speed Control (Continued)

value). 1, 3, 5 can be preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

Sets the speed at which the engine will attempt to increase the engine speed.

NOTE 1: The engine only attempts to increase the engine speed at this rate because
actual engine changes are influenced by other factors such as engine load and
Aux Throttle Control - available engine power.
75071 7507 1 1500 RPM 500 RPM/SEC
Ramp Rate
NOTE 2: This parameter should be set to provide a smooth transition to the desired
engine speed to accommodate applicable PTO equipment.

*7507 is only active when variable modes are selected in 7502.

The maximum engine speed that can be reached using any PTO controls.
Aux Throttle Control -
75081 7508 1600
Maximum Engine Speed
NOTE 1: This parameter must be set properly to protect PTO related equipment.

Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the third (3rd)
PTO preset speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed twice.

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
75091 7509 1000
Preset Engine Speed 3 Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.
This parameter sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when
the fourth (4th) PTO preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed
twice.
Aux Throttle Control - Range must be less than the following setting -
75101 7510 NOTE 1: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the 1000
Preset Engine Speed 4 PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
Stationary Preset section for more information.

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-27


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-28
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the fifth (5th)
PTO preset speed is selected or when SET/COAST is pressed three times.

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE 1: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
75111 7511 1000
Preset Engine Speed 5 Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.

Sets the running engine speed set point that will be maintained when the sixth (6th)
PTO preset speed is selected or when RESUME/ACCEL is pressed three times.

Aux Throttle Control - NOTE: Presets speeds that will not be used can be set to 0 RPM. Refer to the Range must be less than the following setting -
75121 7512 1000
Preset Engine Speed 6 Stationary Preset section for more information. PTO Maximum Engine Speed (7508)
PTO In Cab - Engine Speed Control (Continued)

*All need to be set to the same value. 1200-1600 RPM (1400 to target the middle
value). 1, 3, 5 can be preset, and 2, 4, 6 can be another.
Parameters for PTO Override Configurations
Aux Throttle Control - 0 - Return to Zero Required
75131 7513 Set the return to Zero requirements for the Remote Pedal. 1
Return to Zero 1 - Return to Zero Not Required
Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Service Brake Disables PTO
75141 7514 Allows operator to set the Service Brake to disable the In-Cab PTO. 0
ATC with Service Brake 1 - Service Brake Does Not Change PTO

Allows the use of PTO without requiring the parking brake set.
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
0 - Parking Brake Disables PTO
ATC with Parking Brake 75151 7515 0
NOTE: Depending on the calibration; some calibrations have the Parking Brake 1 - Parking Brake Does Not Change PTO
Released
interactions with PTO disabled permanently.
0 - Driveline Status Disables PTO operation
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75161 7516 (7517) This parameter allows operator to disable the ATC with In-Cab Controls. 1 - Driveline Status Does Not Change PTO 0
ATC with Driveline Status
operation

Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - In- Cab Controls Disables PTO


75171 7517 Control - Disable ATC with In-Cab Controls 0
ATC with In-Cab Controls 1 - In- Cab controls Do Not Change PTO

Aux Throttle Control - Disable 0 - Vehicle Speed Limit Disables PTO


75181 7518 Allows In-Cab PTO to be disabled with vehicle speed. 0
ATC with Vehicle Speed 1 - Vehicle Speed Limit Does Not Change PTO

Allows the operator to use a single switch to activate PTO PRESET 1 or 2.


0 - Disable the ability to activate the PTO enable
NOTE 1: After PTO/ RPTO has been enabled, PTO and/or RPTO will require a signal (CC/PTO On, RPRE, RVAR) at the same
transition in the state of the PTO control switches (CC RESUME/ SET, or RVAR/ time as the PTO incrementing signal (Set,
RPRE switches) to transition to a new PRESET mode from the current state. For Resume)
Aux Throttle Control -
75191 7519 example, a transition in the state of the PTO control switches would require a release 1
SPDT Enable
of the CC SET switch then re-activation to transition from PRESET 1 to PRESET 3 1 - Enable the ability to activate the PTO enable
while CC ON remains active. signal (CC/PTO On, RPRE, RVAR) at the same
time as the PTO incrementing signal (Set,
NOTE 2: A combination of ON, RVAR or RPRE with SET will select PRESET1. A Resume)
combination of ON, RVAR, or RPRE with RESUME will select PRESET 2.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
0 - Service Brake Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75201 7520 Allows operator to set the Service Brake to disable the Remote PTO. Switch 0
RP with Service Brake
1 - Service Brake Does Not Change Remote
Allows the use of PTO without requiring the parking brake set. 0 - Parking Brake Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
Switch
PTO In Cab - Engine Speed Control (Continued)

RP with Parking Brake 75211 7521 0


NOTE: Depending on the calibration; some calibrations have the Parking Brake 1 - Parking Brake Does Not Change Remote
Released
interactions with Remote PTO disabled permanently. Pedal Switch

Allows the use of Remote PTO without requiring the Driveline Status indicate
"driveline disengaged".
0 - Driveline Status Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable NOTE: For Automatic transmissions, "Driveline Status" refers to the gear selector; Switch
75221 7522 0
RP with Driveline Status moving the gear selector from the Park/ Neutral position will cancel the current 1 - Driveline Status Does Not Change Remote
Remote PTO mode. For Manual transmissions, "Driveline Status" refers to the clutch Pedal Switch
switch or gear selector status; pressing the clutch or moving the gear selector from
"Neutral" will cancel the current Remote PTO mode.

0 - In-Cab Controls Disables Remote Pedal


Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75231 7523 Allows operator to disable the RP with In-Cab Controls. Switch 0
RP with In-Cab Controls
1 - In-Cab Controls Do Not Change Remote
0 - Vehicle Speed Limit Disables Remote Pedal
Aux Throttle Control - Disable
75241 7524 Allows Remote PTO to be disabled with vehicle speed. Switch 0
RP with Vehicle Speed
1 - Vehicle Speed Limit Does Not Change
Allows the operator to enable or disable RP overrides.
Aux Throttle Control - Enable 0 - Disable
75251 7525 0
RP Overrides 1 - Enable
*If this is 0, all interlock overrides are disabled.
Aux Throttle Control - Enable 0 - Disable the In-Cab PTO overrides
75261 7526 Allows the operator to enable or disable In-Cab PTO overrides. 0
ATC 1 - Enable the In-Cab PTO overrides
Min. Cruise Control
Control

76031 7603 Minimum vehicle speed at which cruise control can be engaged. 25 100 MPH 35
Cruise

Vehicle Speed
Max. Cruise Control
76041 7604 Maximum road speed at which the cruise will control the vehicle speed. 30 127 MPH 68
Vehicle Speed
0 - Standard Warning (Overspeed)
Determines how the EWPS Feature reacts if critical engine operating limits are 1 - 3-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low
Engine Warning and
Protection System

exceeded. If set to: Oil Pressure, Low Coolant)


1 - The EWPS feature provides a visual and audible indication if critical engine 2 - 3-way Protection (Overspeed, Overheat, Low
operating limits exceed a threshold. Oil Pressure, Low Coolant)
Engine Warning And
77002 7700 2 - The EWPS feature provides 2 levels of protection. 3 - 2-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low 1
Protection System Mode
(Less Severe) - A visual and audible indication occurs if critical engine operating Oil Pressure)
parameters exceed the 1st threshold. 4 - 4-way Warning (Overspeed, Overheat, Low
(More Severe) - The EWPS feature will shut down the engine if critical engine Oil Pressure, Genset Speed Control)
operating parameters exceed the 2nd threshold. 5 - 2-way Protection (Overspeed, Overheat, Low
Oil Pressure)

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-29


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-30
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Road Speed Limiting Control 0 - Disable
Vehicle Speed Governor

79001 7900 Required to be set to 1. 1


Mode 1 - Enable

Sets the maximum engine speed allowed when an active vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
Engine Speed
fault exits and PTO engine speed control is not active. This parameter might be useful
Limit with VSS 79011 7901 700 5000 RPM 2200
in preventing the operator from exceeding the Max Vehicle Speed with Road Speed
Fault
Limiting On (7902) parameter setting by tampering with the vehicle speed sensor.
Max Vehicle Speed with Road Sets the maximum accelerator controlled vehicle speed. The engine will not power the
Speed 79021 7902 vehicle faster than this value. This parameter can be used to encourage driver 1 99 MPH 68
Limiting On behavior.
Should be enabled if the vehicle is equipped with a 2-speed axle.
0 - Disable
Two Speed Axle Enable 80001 8000
1 - Enable
NOTE: This parameter can be used for a transfer case enable.
This value is provided by the tire manufacturer and is used in the vehicle speed
Tire Revs Per Mile 80011 8001 300 676 RPM
calculation.
This is the application specific final drive gear ratio.

NOTE 1: This is a “low speed” gear ratio if equipped with a 2-speed axle.
Rear Axle Ratio Low 80020 8002 2.50 30.00
NOTE 2: If equipped with a single speed axle, then parameter (8002) and (8003)
must be programmed to the same value.
This is the application specific final drive gear ratio.
Vehicle Setup

NOTE 1: This is a “high speed” gear ratio if equipped with a 2-speed axle.
Rear Axle Ratio High 80030 8003 2.50 30.00
Sales Tools Driven
NOTE 2: If equipped with a single speed axle, then parameter (8002) and (8003)
must be programmed to the same value.
Transmission Top Gear Ratio 80041 8004 The gear ratio of the highest gear in the transmission. 0.6 20
Indicates the low axle ratio pulses per mile (PPM). This is found by multiplying the
Low Axle Ratio Pulses Per
80051 8005 following: [Tire Revs Per Mile (8001) x Rear Axle Ratio Low (8002) x Transmission 18,017 200,000 PPM
Mile Count
Tailshaft GearTeeth (8007)]
Indicates the high axle ratio PPM. This is found by multiplying the following: [Tire
High Axle Ratio Pulses Per
80061 8006 Revs Per Mile (8001) x Rear Axle Ratio Low (8002) x Transmission Tailshaft 18,017 200,000 PPM
Mile Count
GearTeeth (8007)]
Transmission Tailshaft Gear
80071 8007 Indicates the number of teeth on the transmission output OR transfer case shaft. 5 255
Teeth
Low Idle Engine Speed 82020 8202 The engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) at normal low engine idle speed. 650 750 RPM
Protection
Password

The password locks the parameters so they cannot be changed without the
Customer Password 87002 8700 Up to 8 Alphanumeric characters required. 0000
password.
Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Determines the functionality of the Engine Fan Control (EFC) feature. If set to: 0 - Disable Chosen based on
Engine Fan Control Mode 90001 9000 1 - The feature includes: 1. Cooling fan turns ON at 100% and OFF based on engine 1 - ON/OFF Coolant Temp Control the fan type
coolant temperature. 2 - ON/OFF Temp Control Retarder installed.
Sets the engine coolant temperature threshold for engine fan ON command; when the
Fan ON Temperature for Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) exceeds this threshold, the fan will turn ON.
Engine Fan Control

90021 9002 -40 302 F 212°F


Engine Cooling Control WARNING: Changing of this parameter may have an adverse effect on the engine life
if done improperly.

Sets the engine coolant temperature threshold for engine fan OFF command; when
Fan OFF Temperature for
90031 9003 the ECT drops below this threshold, the fan will turn OFF. WARNING: Changing of -40 302 F 204°F
Engine Cooling Control
this parameter may have an adverse effect on the engine life if done improperly.
Sets the minimum time the fan will remain ON at each activation if the fan has been
Total Time Fan Duty Cycle
90181 9018 cycled ON-OFF-ON too frequently. This is to protect the fan drive lining from wear 0 120 SEC 30
Protection is Enabled
and tear due to excessive and rapid fan cycling.
Extended Fan On Time During
90191 9019 Sets the period of time where the extended fan ON time parameter (9018) is in effect. 120 1800 SEC 120
Fan Duty Cycle Protection

Sets the driveline mode for PTO operation: If set to:


0 - The ECM receives vehicle speed via SAE J1939 or hardwired from the
transmission output shaft - vehicle speed sensor input.

NOTE 1: The driveline must be disengaged at all times for operation of the split shaft
PTO - Split Shaft Operation

Driveline Status for Hydraulic 0 - Neutral Operation


93011 9301 feature. If set to: 0
Pressure Governor Operation 1 - Split Shaft Operation
1 - And the transfer case is engaged, the ECM receives wheel-based vehicle speed
via SAE J1939 from the anti-lock brake system (ABS).

NOTE 2: A transition in driveline status will cause the split shaft feature to be
deactivated.

Allows the operator to select the vehicle speed display. If set to:
0 - The ECM will transmit vehicle speed to the cluster based on the SAE J1939 output
0 - Wheel speed selected when split shaft is
Vehicle Speed Source from the anti- lock brake system (ABS), the speedometer will not display a vehicle
enabled
Selection When Split Shaft is 93071 9307 speed unless the vehicle wheels are rotating. 0
1 - Output shaft speed selected when split shaft
Active 1 - The ECM will transmit vehicle speed to the cluster based on the signal from the
is enabled
transmission output shaft speed sensor, the speedometer will display a vehicle speed
while the split shaft mode is operational based on the output shaft speed.
Cold Ambient

Enables the Cold Ambient Protection functionality.


Protection

0 - Disable
Cold Ambient Protection
94001 9400 NOTE: Low and High idle speeds are non-adjustable. 1 - Enable 0
Enable
*Disabled, as it would interfere with PTO operation.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-31


ENGINE PARAMETERS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER ENGINE • 12 FEBRUARY 2015 — 12-32
ENGINE PARAMETERS

Parameter Recommended
Parameter Sequence ID Notes Min Max UOM
ID Values
Enables or disables the service interval feature. If set to:
0 - The service interval feature is disabled. 0 - Disable
Service Interval Mode 95001 9500 1
1 - The feature will turn on the “Change Engine Oil” indication if the service interval 1 - Enable
has expired.

Determines the fuel used between the last service interval reset and when the
“Change Engine Oil” indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value recommended
Fuel Used Service in the “Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures” section of the “Engine
95011 9501 0 65,535 GAL 1500
Interval Operation and Maintenance Manual”.

NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if a service interval based on fuel used is not desired.

Determines the engine hours between the last service interval reset and when the
“Change Engine Oil” indication occurs. Set this parameter to the value recommended
Engine Hour Service Interval 95021 9502 in the “Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures” section of the “Engine 0 2000 HRS 450
Operation and Maintenance Manual”. NOTE: Set this parameter to (0) if a service
interval based on engine hours is not desired.

This parameter determines the vehicle distance between the last service interval
reset and when the “Change Engine Oil” indication occurs. Set this parameter to the
Vehicle Distance Service
95031 9503 value recommended in the “Maintenance Schedule and Service Procedures” section 0 65,535 GAL 8000
Interval
Service Interval

of the “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”. NOTE: Set this parameter to 0 if
a service interval based on vehicle distance is not desired.
This parameter is used to create an offset; the Service Interval -fuel used accumulator
Fuel Used Starting Value 95041 9504 0 536,870,911 GAL 0
will not begin to increment until reaching this value.
This parameter is used to create an offset; the Service Interval - engine hour
Engine Hour Starting Value 95051 9505 0 214,748,364 HRS 0
accumulator will not begin to increment until reaching this value.
Vehicle Distance Starting This parameter is used to create an offset; the Service Interval - vehicle distance
95061 9506 0 4,294,967,295 MILES 0
Value accumulator will not begin to increment until reaching this value.

Determines the functionality of the “Change Engine Oil” indication. If this parameter is
set to 100%, the “Change Engine Oil” indication will occur when one or more intervals
(hours, fuel, or distance) have fully expired. If the value is set to 50%, however; the
Service Soon Percent 95071 9507 “Change Engine Oil” indication occurs when half of the interval has accumulated. 5 100 % 0

NOTE: Refer to the “calculations” section and the examples at the end of this
document to understand how to set this parameter.

Set this parameter to a value of 1 to ensure the change oil lamp


Change Oil Lamp 0 - No
95081 9508 will turn on and remain on once the oil change service interval has 0
Always On 1 - Yes
expired.
Set this parameter to a value of 1 to reset the service interval and
turn off the “Change Engine Oil” indication.
Service Interval 0 - No
95101 9510 0
Reset Request NOTE: The service interval may be reset by means of the cruise 1 - Yes
control switches. Refer to the Service Interval Reset section in this document for more
information.
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION PTO DATA

All Models
NOTE: Do not reuse PTO cover plate gaskets

INSIDE EDGE OF TOP FLANGE

CENTERLINE REAR VIEW


AE
CENTERLINE FRONT SPRING EYE AF
AD
AC AG
AH

AA (LT) (LT)
AB (RT) (RT)
AJ
AJ
13–0004

Clearance
Provided for Left PTO Location Right PTO Location
Transmission Engine SAE Envelope
Left Right
AA AC AE AG AB AD AF AH AJ
PTO PTO
13APZ – Allison 5-Speed Automatic,1000_HS
13ARD – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 1000_EVS
13ARC – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 1000_RDS On/Off Hwy Cummins® ISB A A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1569.9 205.17 144.0 0° 211.6
13AVU – Allison 5-Speed Automatic,1000_HS
13AVW – Allison 5-Speed Automatic,1000_EVS_P

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TRANSMISSION • 13 FEBRUARY 2015 — 13-1


TRANSMISSION PTO DATA - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TRANSMISSION • 13 FEBRUARY 2015 — 13-2
TRANSMISSION PTO DATA - ALL MODELS
Clearance
Provided for Left PTO Location Right PTO Location
Transmission Engine SAE Envelope
Left Right
AA AC AE AG AB AD AF AH AJ
PTO PTO
13ARB – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2100_EVS_P
13ARA – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2100 RDS_P On/Off Hwy
13ARE – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2200_HS
13ARJ – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2500_EVS_P
13ARH – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2200_EVS_P
13ASK – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2200_RDS_P On/Off Hwy
13ASL – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2500_HS
13ASM – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2500_RDS_P Refuse
13ASN – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2100_HS MaxxForce® DT
13ASP – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2500_RDS (On/Off Highway) A A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1569.9 205.17 144.0 0° 211.6
Cummins® ISB
13ASR – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2550_HS
13AST – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2500_EVS_P On/Off Hwy
13ASY – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2500_EVS_P
13ATA – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2200_HS
13ATB – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2200_RDS_P
13ATD – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2500_HS
13ATJ – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 2550_RDS
13ATL – Allison 5-Speed Automatic, 3000_HS
13AMY – Allison 5-Speed Automatic 2550_EVS_P
MaxxForce® DT N/A N/A N/A N/A 144 0 N/A N/A 144 0 N/A
13AMX – Allison 5-Speed Automatic 2550_RDS_P On/Off Hwy
A = SAE Type 1 (6–Bolt) B = SAE Type 2 (8–Bolt) C = Not Qualified
TRANSMISSION PTO DATA (CONTINUED)

All Models
NOTE: Do not reuse PTO cover plate gaskets

INSIDE EDGE OF TOP FLANGE

CENTERLINE REAR VIEW


AE
CENTERLINE FRONT SPRING EYE AF
AD
AC AG
AH

AA (LT) (LT)
AB (RT) (RT)
AJ
AJ
13–0004

Clearance
Provided for Left PTO Location Right PTO Location
Transmission Engine SAE Envelope
Left Right
AA AC AE AG AB AD AF AH AJ
PTO PTO
13ATG – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 2100_RDS_P On/Off Hwy
13ATE – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 2200_EVS_P MaxxForce® DT N/A N/A N/A N/A 144 0 N/A N/A 144 0 N/A
13ATH – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 2500_RDS_P

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TRANSMISSION • 13 FEBRUARY 2015 — 13-3


TRANSMISSION PTO DATA - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TRANSMISSION • 13 FEBRUARY 2015 — 13-4
TRANSMISSION PTO DATA - ALL MODELS
Clearance
Provided for Left PTO Location Right PTO Location
Transmission Engine SAE Envelope
Left Right
AA AC AE AG AB AD AF AH AJ
PTO PTO
13ATK – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_TRV_P
13ATL – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_HS
13ATN – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3500_EVS_P
13ATS – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_TRV_P
13AUK – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_EVS_P
13AUL – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_EVS_P
13AUM – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3500_EVS_P
13AVE – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_HS Navistar® N9
C N/A 1100 233 140.5 8° N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
13AVG – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3500_RDS_P (On/Off Highway) Cummins® ISB
13AVH – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3500_RDS_P (Refuse/Mixer)
13AVJ – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_RDS_P (On/Off Highway)
13AVK – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_RDS_P
13AVL – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3500_RDS_P (On/Off Highway)
13AVP – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3500_RDS_P (Refuse/Mixer)
13AVR – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_RDS_P (On/Off Highway)
13AVS – Allison 6-Speed Automatic, 3000_RDS_P (Refuse)
TRANSMISSION PTO DATA (CONTINUED)

All Models
NOTE: Do not reuse PTO cover plate gaskets

INSIDE EDGE OF TOP FLANGE

CENTERLINE REAR VIEW


AE
CENTERLINE FRONT SPRING EYE AF
AD
AC AG
AH

AA (LT) (LT)
AB (RT) (RT)
AJ
AJ
13–0004

Clearance
Provided for Left PTO Location Right PTO Location
Transmission Engine SAE Envelope
Left Right
AA AC AE AG AB AD AF AH AJ
PTO PTO
13GRS – Eaton Fuller 5-Speed Manual, F_5405B MaxxForce® DT
A A 1554.2 387.8 102.6 20.0° 1554.2 387.8 102.6 20.0° 253.8
13GRZ – Eaton Fuller 5-Speed Manual, F_6405B-DM3 Cummins® ISB
13GSL –- Eaton Fuller 5-Speed Manual, F_5505B-DM3 MaxxForce® DT
N/A N/A N/A N/A 108.9 20 N/A N/A 108.9 20 N/A
Cummins® ISB
13GNG – Fuller 6-Speed Manual, FS_5406N MaxxForce® DT
A A 1331 384.4 102.5 20.3° 1331 384.6 102.9 20.3° 253.5
13GMS – Fuller 6-Speed Manual, FS_6406N Cummins® ISB
13GMJ – Fuller 6-Speed Manual, FWO_8406A MaxxForce® DT/9 A A 1554.2 387.8 102.9 20.3° 1554.2 387.8 102.9 20.3° 253.5
13GSM – Eaton Fuller 6-Speed Manual, FO_5506B-DM3 MaxxForce® DT
N/A N/A N/A N/A 108.9 20 N/A N/A 108.9 20 N/A
13GSP –- Eaton Fuller 6-Speed Manual, FO_6506B-DM3 Cummins® ISB
13GRT – Eaton Fuller 6-Speed Manual, FO_5406B-DM3 MaxxForce® DT
A A 1554.2 387.8 102.6 20.0° 1554.2 387.8 102.6 20.0° 253.8
13GSA – Eaton Fuller 6-Speed Manual, FO_6406B-DM3 Cummins® ISB

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TRANSMISSION • 13 FEBRUARY 2015 — 13-5


TRANSMISSION PTO DATA - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER TRANSMISSION • 13 FEBRUARY 2015 — 13-6
TRANSMISSION PTO DATA - ALL MODELS
TRANSMISSION PTO DATA (CONTINUED)

All Models
NOTE: Do not reuse PTO cover plate gaskets

INSIDE EDGE OF TOP FLANGE

CENTERLINE REAR VIEW


AE
CENTERLINE FRONT SPRING EYE AF
AD
AC AG
AH

AA (LT) (LT)
AB (RT) (RT)
AJ
AJ
13–0004

Clearance
Provided
Left PTO Location Right PTO Location
For SAE
Transmission Engine Envelope
Left Right
AA AC AE AG AB AD AF AH AJ
PTO PTO
13GJT – Fuller 10-Speed Manual, FR-9210B
13GGK – Fuller 10-Speed Manual, FR-11210B MaxxForce® DT/9
B A 1499 369.6 140 90.0° 1506 256 207.1 57.1° 216.4
13GGM – Fuller 10-Speed Manual, FRO-11210C Navistar® N9
14GHL - Fuller 10-Speed Manual, FRO-14210C

A = SAE Type 1 (6–Bolt) B = SAE Type 2 (8–Bolt) C = Not Qualified


REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS
REAR AXLE TREAD
All Models

= DISTANCE (WIDTH) BETWEEN VERTICAL CENTERLINES OF SINGLE TIRES AT


TREAD OPPOSITE ENDS OF AXLE, OR BETWEEN VERTICAL CENTERLINES OF DUAL
SPACING (D.S.) AT OPPOSITE ENDS OF AXLE.
= OVERALL WIDTH OF NEW TIRE AT TOP OF TIRE UNDER MAXIMUM LOAD,
TIRE SECT
INCLUDING 24-HOUR INFLATION GROWTH, AND INCLUDING PROTECTIVE SIDE RIBS,
(Tire Section)
BARS AND DECORATIONS RECOMMENDED BY TIRE MANUFACTURER.

D.S. = DIMENSION (WIDTH) BETWEEN VERTICAL CENTERLINES OF TWO TIRES (DUALS)


(Dual Spacing) ASSEMBLED AT ONE END OF AN AXLE.

TREAD + D.S. + TIRE SECT = OVERALL WIDTH OF AXLE, DUAL RIMS, AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AT TOP OF TIRES
(Tread plus Dual Spacing UNDER LOAD.
plus Tire Section)
TREAD - D.S. - TIRE SECT = DISTANCE (WIDTH) BETWEEN NEAR SIDES OF INNER TIRES OF DUAL ASSEMBLY
(Tread minus Dual Spacing AT TOP OF TIRES UNDER LOAD.
minus Tire Section)
SLR = DISTANCE FROM GROUND TO CENTERLINE OF HUB WHEN TIRES ARE CORRECTLY
(Static Loaded Radius) INFLATED AND UNDER MAXIMUM LOAD RECOMMENDED BY TIRE MANUFACTURER.

14_0008
Dual Tires

The charts shown here list tread information for various wheel/axle combinations. Tread dimensions are not dependent on tire size. Other
dimensions explained here are related to tread and require tire dimensions. For tire dimensions, please contact your tire supplier or refer to the
Component Book (PDB-70000).

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-1
REAR AXLE TREAD - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-2
REAR AXLE TREAD DATA - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 6X4)
REAR AXLE TREAD DATA

All Models (Except 6x4)

Wheel/Rim Single Axle Code


14AET, 14AEW, 14AEY,
14AGR, 14AGX, 14AHA,
14AHB, 14AHC, 14AHK,
14ANR
14AGA 14AHL, 14AHM, 14AHP,
14AJC 14ANS
14AGE 14AHR, 14AHW, 14AJG,
14AHH 14AJE 14ANT
14AGG 14AJH, 14ANW, 14ANX,
Dual 14AHJ 14ANP 14ANU
Type Size Material 14AGY 14ANV, 14ANY, 14ANZ,
Spacing 14APL 14APJ
14CEG 14APA, 14ARB, 14ARK,
14APH
14ARY, 14ARZ, 14ASA,
14ASB, 14ASD,14ATE, 14ATY,
14ATZ, 14CDL, 14CVB, 14051
Brake Type
Air Hyd Air Hyd Air Hyd Air Hyd Air Hyd
19.5 x 6.75 Steel 11.2 – 71.98 – – – – – 71.98 – 72.50
Steel 12.8 – – – – – – – – – –
19.5 x 7.50
Aluminum 12.5 – 72.86 – – – – – 72.86 – 73.38
22.5 x 7.50 Steel 12.9 – 71.98 – – – – – 71.98 – 72.50
Disc
Steel 13.2 – 71.98 – – – – – 71.98 – 72.50
22.5 x 8.25
Aluminum 13.2 – 72.86 – – – – – 72.86 – 73.38
Steel 14.0 – – – – – – – – – –
22.5 x 9.00
Aluminum 14.0 – – – – – – – – – –
REAR AXLE TREAD DATA

6x4 Models

Wheel/Rim Tandem Axle Code


14GEP, 14GER, 14GEZ, 14GGC, 14GGG, 14GGH, 14GGY, 14GJD, 14GJE.
14GJH, 14GJJ, 14GJK, 14GJL, 14GJM, 14GJN, 14GJR, 14GRD, 14GRP, 14GRR,
Dual 14GRS, 14GSX, 14GVE, 14GVY, 14GVK, 14GVL, 14GVN, 14GVR, 14GVU, 14GVX,
Type Size Material
Spacing 14GVY, 14GWY, 14GXC, 14HRC, 14HRE, 14HRL, 14HRM, 14HRS, 14HRW
Air Brake
22.5 x 7.50 Steel 12.9 72.5
Steel 13.2 72.5
22.5 x 8.25
Disc Aluminum 13.2 73.4
Steel 14.0 72.9
22.5 x 9.00
Aluminum 14.0 73.6

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-3
REAR AXLE TREAD DATA - 6X4 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-4
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

Bracket Location - 4x2 Models


Vari-Rate Steel Suspension (14SAH, 14SAM, 14SAN, 14VAB, 14VAC, 14VAD, 14VAG, 14VAH, 14VAJ)

Codes 14SAH, 14VAB, 14VAC Codes 14SAM, 14SAN, 14VAG,


and 14VAD use single cross- 14VAH and 14VAJ use double
member crossmember

5.8 5.6
(146.9) (141.7)

4.6
(117.9)
W/10 INCH RAILS

10.6 19.6 19.7 10.4


1.4 (270.0) (498.0) 1.2 (500.7) (264.2) 2.4
(34.3) (31.3) (60.1)

6.6
11.2 (167.8) 6.9
(285.0) (175.5)

14_0009
REAR SUSPENSION

Hole Pattern - 4x2 Models


Vari-Rate Steel Suspension (14SAH, 14SAM, 14SAN, 14VAB, 14VAC, 14VAD, 14VAG, 14VAH, 14VAJ)

1042.5
(41.0)

224.0 387.5 254.0 401.0 224.0


(18.8) (15.3) (10.0) (15.8) (8.8)

61.0 61.0
(2.4) (2.4)

61.00
(2.40)

61.0
(2.4)

76.0 55.0
(3.0) (2.2)

REAR
AXLE
14_0010

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-5
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-6
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

Bracket Location - 4x2 Models


3-Rod Vari-Rate Steel Suspension (14SCD, 14SCE)

5.79 5.58
(147) (141.7)

10.63 13.23 13.12 10.4


(270) (336) (333.3) (264.2)

11.22
(285)

7.68
8.74 (195.1) 6.91
(222.1) (175.5)
14_3-rod_vari-rate_bracket
REAR SUSPENSION

HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS


3-Rod Vari-Rate Steel Suspension (14SCD, 14SCE)

8.82 14.13 13.92 8.8


(224) (359.02) (353.6) (223.52)

4.8 2.4
2.4
(122) (61) 4.8
(61)
(121.92) 1.77
(44.9)
2.64
(67.07)
14_3-rod_vari-rate_hole

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-7
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-8
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS


Chalmers Suspension (14TBU)

6.9
3.4 (174)
(85.9)

17.8 12.5 6.0


(450.8) (317.6) (152.4)

8.1
(206.6)

26.2 17.7 9.1


(666.7) (449.5)
(232)

12.0
(304.8)

14_0076
REAR SUSPENSION

HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS


Chalmers Suspension (14TBU)

18.5 (469.9)

15.4
AF GREATER THAN
(390.7)
OR EQUAL TO 1000
3.2 (82.6)
12.2 27.7
8.9 (309.3) (703.1) AF LESS
(225.6) 2.3 (58.4) THAN 1000
8.8
2.4 (61) 17.8
6.9 3. 0 (449.1) (223.5)
1.6 2.4
(61) (174.8) (76.2)
(40.9)

1.5
(38.3)
2.0
(50.8)
6. 0 2. 2 4.8
2.0 2.9 3.4 3.2 2.3 (55.5) (122)
(152.4)
(50.8) (73.2) (85.9) (82.6) (57.3)

14_0079

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-9
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-10
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

Bracket Location - 4x2 Models


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 9.25" Ride Height – Top View (14TBJ, 14TBS)

2.2 9.5
(55.9) 4.6 (242.4)
(117.5)
6.5
(166) 4.8
(121.9)

TOP VIEW 0F 4X2 − 9.25 RIDE HEIGHT AIR SUSPENSION

1.9
(48)

14_0015
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 9.25" Ride Height – Right View (14TBJ, 14TBS)

24.9 26.9
(632.4) (683.6)
15.6 3.6
(395.5) (90.5)

11.6
2.7 6.6 7.1
(294.6)
(69) (167) (180)

7.1
(180)

11.6
(294.6)

AXLE
CL
14_0016

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-11
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-12
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 9.25" Ride Height – Left View (14TBJ, 14TBS)

4.6
(116.8) 4.4
3.8 15.6 4.9 6.2 (111.3)
(124.8) (157)
(95.3) (396)

1.3
(33.2)

24.9
(633)

19.0
(482)
AXLE
CL
14_0017
REAR SUSPENSION

Hole Pattern - 4x2 Models


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 9.25" Ride Height – Right and Left Views (14TBJ, 14TBS)

3.5 4.2
13.6
(88.5) (105.9)
(346)

11.2 AXLE 5.4


(285) 2.2 CL (136.3)
(55.2) 4.0
(102) 2.4 8.8
2.4 5.5 (224)
(140) (61)
(61)

3.0
(76.2)

2.0 7.4 1.8 3.0 2.2


3.0 (51.4) (187) (44.8) (76)
(76) (55)
2.3
(58.2) 1.3
2.4 (33.2) 18.1 4.8
(61) (460) (122)

2.4 31.7 22.5


(61) (806) (571)
14_0018

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-13
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-14
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS


Hendrickson Air Suspension, 9.5” Ride Height – Top View (14TAX)

6.1 4.7 5.1


(154.5) (120.6) (128.7)

4.0
(100.5)

2.6
(165.2)

0.4
(11.1)

14_0051
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS


Hendrickson Air Suspension, 9.5” Ride Height – Left View, Outside Rail (14TAX)

7.0
(177) 22.5
(458)
14.2 2.7
(361) 8.0 (69)
(203.2)

1.9
4.5 4.5 (229.2)
(163.1) (161) 6.7
(104.8)

35.3
(895.8)

AXLE

14_0052

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-15
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-16
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 4X2 MODELS


Hendrickson Air Suspension, 9.5” Ride Height – Left View, Inside Rail (14TAX)

11.4 17.2
(234.9) (437.0)

2.5 17.3
0.3 (62.3) (493.4)
(7.9)

2.2 1.1
3.7 (219.7) (247.3)
(181.5)

6.2
(157.5)

AXLE
14_0053
REAR SUSPENSION HOLE PATTERN

HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS


Hendrickson Air Suspension, 9.5” Ride Height – Left View (14TAX)

22.5
(602)

18.3
4.3
(495)
(108)
12.3
3.2
(343)
(81)
3.1
1.0 (111)
(26)

2.6
2.8 2.7 1.6
(67)
(71) (68.5) 2.9
10.0 3.4 (41.5)
2.6 1.8 (74.5)
(253) (44.5) (87)
(66.5) 11.1
3.5 3.8
2.4 (281) 2.9
(62) (90) (96.52)
11.6 AXLE (74.5)
(295)
13.2
(336)
14.2
(361)
27.1
(658)
14_0054

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-17
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - 4X2 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-18
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS


Vari-Rate Steel Suspension (14SAC, 14SAE, 14SAH, 14SAM)

C
L
REAR
AXLE

5.8
(147)

5.6
FWD (143.3) .6
(14.6)

.6
10.6 19.3 19.9 8.4
(14.6)
(270) (490.2) (505.5) (213.4)

5.8
(146.6)

9.0
LOW PROFILE VARI-RATE BRACKETS
(228)
14_0011
REAR SUSPENSION

HOLE PATTERN - LP MODELS


Vari-Rate Steel Suspension (14SAC, 14SAE, 14SAH, 14SAM)

C
L

REAR
FWD AXLE

42.0 6.8
2.4 8.8 (1067) 3.0 (172.7)
(61) (224) (76.2)

1.5
2.4 (38.2)
(61)

2.2
(55)
14_0012

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-19
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - LP MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-20
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION BRACKET LOCATION

BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 5.3" Ride Height – Top View (14TBL, 14TBM, 14TBN)

2.5
6.5 (62.9)
(166) 4.0
(100.4)

14_0019
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 5.3" Ride Height – Left View, Inside Rail (14TBL, 14TBM, 14TBN)

5.8 20.7 24.9 8.1


(147.7) 4.6 (525.9) (632.4) (206.2)
(116.2) 5.7 3.5
(145.3) (89.7)
1.0 .5
1.1
(24.6) (26.8) (12.7)

4.2
(107.7)

9.3
(235)

7.1
(180)

AXLE
C
L

11.6
(294.6)

14_0020

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-21
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-22
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - LP MODELS


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 5.3" Ride Height – Right View, Outside Rail (14TBL, 14TBM, 14TBN)

.7
.7 (17.8)
(17.8) 4.4
15.6 (111.3)
3.3
(396) (83.5)
3.6 2.6
(90.9) (64.8)

2.6
(66)

24.9
(632.4)

19.0
(482.0)
AXLE
C
L
14_0021
REAR SUSPENSION

HOLE PATTERN - LP MODELS


International® Ride Optimized Air Suspension, 5.3" Ride Height (14TBL, 14TBM, 14TBN)

21.5
(546)
18.1
(460)
10.0
(255)
29.3 4.2
(745) (106.8) 5.5
.7 4.4 (140) .6
(19) (111.2) (16)
1.8 2.0
2.2 8.8 1.5 (44.6)
(54.9) (50.7)
(224) (38.6)
2.4
(61)

3.2
(80.6)
2.4
(61) 3.0 3.5
1.6
(76.2) (89.9) (40)
1.4
(36)

AXLE
CL
14_0022

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-23
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - LP MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-24
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 6X4 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 6X4 MODELS


4-Spring Suspension (14UNA, 14670)

FWD

6.2 7.6 5.7


(157.9) (145.9)
(193.3)

1.5 1.5 4.3


(39.3) 10.4 (39.3) (109.8)
(264) 10.4 8.8
(264) (224)

16.8 16.8 9.9


(425.5) (427.5) (252)

48.0 48.0
(1219.2) (1218.9)
53.2 52.4
(1351.2) (1330.9)
14_0013
REAR SUSPENSION

HOLE PATTERN - 6X4 MODELS


4-Spring Suspension (14UNA, 14670)

8.8
(223.5)
8.8 39.2 8.8 34.6 5.8
(224) (995.2) (224) (878.4) (148.5)
2.4
(61) 2.8
(70)

2.4 2.4
(61) (61)
2.4
(61) 3.0 2.4 5.4
2.4 (136.5)
(76) (61) 3.0 (61) 6.3 2.3
(76) 2.6 (160) (57.5)
(66.4) 7.2
(184)
14_0014

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-25
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - 6X4 MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-26
REAR SUSPENSION - BRACKET LOCATION - 6X4 MODELS
REAR SUSPENSION

BRACKET LOCATION - 6X4 MODELS


International® 4-Spring 52” – Top and Left View (14UNU)

durastar_14unu
REAR SUSPENSION

HOLE PATTERN - 6X4 MODELS


International® 4-Spring 52” (14UNU)

durastar_14uns_holes

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-27
REAR SUSPENSION - REAR SUSPENSION
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER REAR AXLES & SUSPENSIONS • 14 FEBRUARY 2015 — 14-28
REAR SUSPENSION - HOLE PATTERN - 6X4 MODELS
FUEL TANKS
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4300 and 4400


Single 50 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (15SGJ)

REG. EXT CREW


CAB. CAB. CAB
25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF)
(660) (455)

33.62 25.15
(854) (639)

FWD

34.65 5.38
(880) (137)

16.29 16.61
(414) (422)

11.72 21.42 4.97


(298) (544) (126)
15_0010

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-1


FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4300 AND 4400
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-2
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
Single 50 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SGK)

CREW EXT. REG.


CAB CAB CAB

17.91 25.98
(REF) (REF)
(455) (660)

FWD

25.15 33.62
(639) (854)

5.38 34.65
(137) (880)

16.29 16.60
(414) (422)

4.97 21.42 11.72


(126) (544) (298)

15_0009
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4x2 and 6x4


Single 50 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SNY, 15SNZ)

STD CAB

FWD
33.86 22.83
(860) (580)

3.77 36.26
(96) (921)

14.49 19.14
19.36
(368) (486)
(492)

21.42
4.97
(544)
(126)
15_0014

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-3


FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4x2 AND 6x4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-4
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 AND 4400 6X4
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4300 4x2, 4400 4x2 and 4400 6x4


Single 50 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (15SPB, 15SPC)

REG EXT CREW


CAB CAB CAB
26.0 17.9
(660) (455)

FRONT

23.5 5.4
(596) (137)
33.6
(854)

34.6
(880)

19.4 19.3
(492) (489) 14.4
(367)

8.3 21.4
(210) (544)
15SPB_15SPC
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4300, 4400 4x2 and 4400 LP


Single 65 Gallon, Rectangular, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SSE)

CREW EXT. STD.


CAB CAB CAB
17.91 (REF) 25.98 (REF)
(455) (660)

20.21 32.14
(513)
(816)

FWD

25.97
(660)
66.00
(1676)

13.11
(333) 23.73 34.02 8.43
(603) (864) (214)
15_0011

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-5


FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4300, 4400 4x2 AND 4400 LP
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-6
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4300 AND 4400
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4300 and 4400


Single 70 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (15SGG)

REG. EXT. CREW


CAB CAB CAB

25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF)


(660) (455)

33.62 25.15
FWD (854) (639)

39.37 .66
(1000) (17)

19.36
(492)

19.05
21.42 9.70 (484) 14.42
(544) (246) (366)

15_0012
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4x2 and 6x4


Single 70 Gallon, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (15SMD)

BACK OF REGULAR CAB

FRONT

33.54
(852)

40.28
(1023)
40.91
(1039)

19.45 21.34
(494) 14.37 (542)
(365)

9.09 21.42
(231) (544)
15smd

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-7


FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4X2 AND 6X4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-8
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4300 AND 4400
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4300 and 4400


Single 70 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SGH)

CREW EXT. REG.


CAB CAB CAB

[REF] 17.91 25.98 [REF]


(455) (660)

FWD

33.28
(845)

.66
(17) 40.85
(1038)

19.32 9.70 21.42 21.29


14.36
(491) (246) (544) (541)
(365)
15_0030
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4x2 and 6x4


Single 70 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SRU)

FRONT

28.5
(723) 35.2
(895

7.8 40.0
(198) (1017)

19.1
22.5 (486)
(571)

5.6 34.0
(141) (864)
15_0013

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-9


FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4X2 AND 6X4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-10
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4X2 AND 6X4
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4x2 and 6x4


Single 100 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (15SGD)

REG EXT CREW


CAB CAB CAB
26.0 17.9
(660) (455)

FRONT

33.6
(854) 25.2
(641)

40.0 17.1
(1017) (433)

22.5 19.1
(572) 14.4
(486) (366)

8.3 21.4 20.2


(210) (544) (512)
15SGD
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4x2 and 6x4


Single 100 Gallon, “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SGE)

CREW EXT REG


CAB CAB CAB
17.9 26.0
(455) (660)

FRONT

25.2
(641) 33.5
(851)

17.1 40.9
(433) (1039)

19.1
(486) 22.5
14.4 (572)
(366)

7.3 20.2 21.4 9.1


(186) (512) (544) (231)
15SGE

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-11


FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4X2 AND 6X4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-12
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - ALL MODELS
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

All Models
Dual 100 Gallon Total Capacity, “D” Style, 50 Gallon Mounted Left Side Under Cab, 50 Gallon Mounted Right Side Under Cab
(15DMW)

REG. EXT CREW CREW EXT. REG.


CAB. CAB. CAB CAB CAB CAB

25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF)


(660) (455) 17.91 (REF) 25.98
(660) (REF)
(455)

FWD
FWD

33.62 25.15
(854) (639) 25.15 33.62
(63.9) (854)

34.65 5.38
(137) 5.38 34.65
(880) (137) (880)

16.29 16.61
(414) (422) 16.29 16.60
(414) (422)

11.72 21.42 4.97


(298) 4.97 21.42 11.72
(544) (126) (298)
(126) (544)
15_0017 15_0018
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4300 and 4400


Dual 140 Gallon Total Capacity, “D” Style, 70 Gallon Mounted Left Side Under Cab, 70 Gallon Mounted Right Side Under Cab
(15DMV)

REG. EXT. CREW CREW EXT. REG.


CAB CAB CAB CAB CAB CAB

17.91 (REF) 25.98 (REF)


25.98 (REF) 17.91 (REF) (660)
(455)
(660) (455)

FWD FWD

25.15 33.33
33.62 25.15 (639) (847)
(854) (639)

.66 39.37
39.37 .66 (17) (1000)
(1000) (17)

19.36 19.05
492 22.47 (484)
(571)

19.05
21.42 9.70 14.42
(484) 14.42 9.70 21.42 (366)
(544) (246) (366) (246) (544)
15_0019 15_0020

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-13


FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4300 AND 4400
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-14
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR) - MODELS 4x2 and 6x4
FUEL TANK LOCATION (EGR)

Models 4x2 and 6x4


Dual 120 Gallon Total Capacity, “D” Style, 70 Gallon Mounted Under Cab Left Side, 70 Gallon Mounted Under Cab Right Side (15DUJ,
15DUK)

STD CAB STD CAB

FWD
FWD

25.15 33.86 22.83


33.62 (860) (580)
(854) (639)

.66 3.77 36.26


39.37 (17) (96) (921)
(1000)

19.36
19.05
(492)
(484) 19.14
14.42 19.36 14.49
(486)
(366) (492) (368)

21.42 9.70 21.42


4.97
(544) (246) (126)
(544)

15_0021 15_0022
UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR)

Models 4x2 and LP


Left Side Mount With One Step – With Rectangular Fuel Tanks (516006)

BACK
OF
CAB

32.15
(817)

REFERENCE ONLY:
BATTERY BOX SHOWN

7.48 TYP
FWD (190)

32.76 4.52
(832) (115)

4.62 1.48
(117) (38)
15_0023

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-15


UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR) - MODELS 4x2 AND LP
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-16
UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR) - MODELS 4x2 AND LP
UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR)

Models 4x2 and LP


Right Side Mount With One Step – With Rectangular Fuel Tanks

BACK
OF
CAB

32.15
(817)

FOR REFERENCE ONLY:


BATTERY BOX SHOWN

7.48 TYP
(190)
FWD
4.39 32.76
(111) (832)

1.48 4.62
(38) (117)
15_0024
UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR)

Models 4x2 and LP


Left Side Mount With One Step – With 50 and 65 Gallon Rectangular Fuel Tanks

BACK
OF
CAB

32.14
(816)

FWD

75.61 8.31
(1921) (211)

3.75
15SCU* (95)
15SCV 15SCG*
15DJL 15SCX
15DJR
15_0025

* For fuel tank dimensions see fuel tank sections – left shown, right opposite

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-17


UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR) - MODELS 4x2 AND LP
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-18
UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR) - ALL MODELS
UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR)

All Models
Left Side Mount With Two Steps – With “D” Style Fuel Tanks

BACK
OF
CAB

33.62
(854)

REFERENCE ONLY:
BATTERY BOX SHOWN

FWD 11.63
(295)

32.76 4.59
(832) (117)

A
B

15_0026

A= 13.47 (342) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks


16.17 (411) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks
B= 11.72 (298) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks
14.42 (366) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks
UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR)

All Models
Right Side Mount With Two Steps – With “D” Style Fuel Tanks

BACK
OF
CAB

33.62
(854)
REFERENCE ONLY:
BATTERY BOX SHOWN

FWD
11.63
(295)

4.39 32.76
(111) (832)

A
B

15_0027

A= 13.47 (342) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks


16.17 (411) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks
B= 11.72 (298) with “D” Style 50 Gallon Fuel Tanks
14.42 (366) with “D” Style 70 Gallon Fuel Tanks

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-19


UNDER CAB STEP LOCATION WITH CREW CAB (EGR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-20
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 100 Gallon Total Capacity, 19” “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SGD)

durastar_15sgd
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 100 Gallon Total Capacity, 19” “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SGE)

durastar_15sge

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-21


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-22
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 70 Gallon Total Capacity, 19” “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab with Under Cab Def Tank (15SGG, 15SMD)

durastar_15sgg_15smd_with_uc_def
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 70 Gallon Total Capacity, 19” “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab with BOC Def Tank (15SGG, 15SMD)

durastar_15sgg_15smd_with_boc_def

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-23


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-24
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Single 70 Gallon Total Capacity, 19” “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SGH, 15SME)

durastar_15sgh_15sme
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 50 Gallon Total Capacity, 16” “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab with Under Cab Def Tank (15SGJ)

durastar_15sgj_with_uc_def

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-25


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-26
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 50 Gallon Total Capacity, 16” “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab with BOC Def Tank (15SGJ)

durastar_15sgj_with_boc_def
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 50 Gallon Total Capacity, 16” “D” Style, Mounted Right Side Under Cab (15SGK)

durastar_15sgk

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-27


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-28
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS (EXCEPT 4300 SBA LP 4X2)
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models (except 4300 SBA LP 4x2)


Single 50 Gallon, 19” “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (15SRE, 15SWY)

durastar_15sre_15swy
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

Models 4300 & 4400 SBA 4x2, 4400 SBA LP 4x2, 4400 SBA 6x4
Single 40 Gallon, 16” “D” Style, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (Code15SWU)

durastar_15swu

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-29


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - MODELS 4300 & 4400 SBA 4X2, 4400 SBA LP 4X2, 4400 SBA 6X4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-30
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - MODELS 4300 & 4400 SBA 4X2, 4400 SBA LP 4X2, 4400 SBA 6X4
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

Models 4300 & 4400 SBA 4x2, 4400 SBA LP 4x2, 4400 SBA 6x4
Single 50 Gallon, 24”, Mounted Left Side Under Cab (15SXJ, 15SXK)

durastar_15sxj_15sxk
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Dual 70 Gallon (140 Gallon Total Capacity), 19”, Mounted Under Cab Left and Right Side (15DMV, 15DYS)

durastar_15dmv_15dys

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-31


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-32
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Dual 70 Gallon (140 Gallon Total Capacity), 19”, Mounted Under Cab Left and Right Side (15DTA, 15DZW)

durastar_15dzw_15dta
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

Models 4300 & 4400 SBA 4x2, 4400 SBA 6x4


Dual 90 Gallon Total Capacity (40 Gallon Left, 50 Gallon Right), 16”, Mounted Under Cab Left and Right Side (15DYT, 15DYU)

durastar_15dyt_15dyu

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-33


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - MODELS 4300 & 4400 SBA 4X2, 4400 SBA 6X4
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-34
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Dual 120 Gallon Total Capacity (50 Gallon Left, 70 Gallon Right), 19”, Mounted Under Cab Left and Right Side (15DYZ, 15DZA)

durastar_15dyz_15dza
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Dual 90 Gallon Total Capacity (40 Gallon Left, 50 Gallon Right), 16”, Mounted Under Cab Left Side and BOC Right Side (15DZT,
15DZX)

durastar_15dzt_15dzx

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-35


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-36
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Dual 50 Gallon (100 Gallon Total Capacity), 19”, Mounted Under Cab Left Side and BOC Right Side (15DZU, 15DZY)

durastar_15dzu_15dzy
FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR)

All Models
Dual 120 Gallon Total Capacity (50 Gallon Left, 70 Gallon Right), 19”, Mounted Under Cab Left Side and BOC Right Side (15DZV,
15DZZ)

durastar_15dzv_15dzz

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-37


FUEL TANK AND STEP LOCATION (SCR) - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-38
DEF TANK LOCATION (SCR) - DAY CAB
DEF TANK LOCATION (SCR)

Day Cab
Frame Mounted Ouside Left Rail, Under Cab; 5 Gallon Capacity (15WCN)

durastar_15wcn_day_top_side_view
DEF TANK LOCATION (SCR)

Day, Extended and Crew Cab


Frame Mounted Ouside Left Rail, Under Cab; 7 Gallon Capacity (15WDG)

durastar_15wdg_day_extended__crew_top_side_view

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-39


DEF TANK LOCATION (SCR) - DAY, EXTENDED AND CREW CAB
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-40
DEF TANK LOCATION (SCR) - DAY AND EXTENDED CAB
DEF TANK LOCATION (SCR)

Day and Extended Cab


Frame Mounted Ouside Left Rail, Back of Cab; 7 Gallon Capacity (15WDH)

durastar_15wdh_day_extended_top_side_view
DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR

Models with SCR


The following section is intended to give you information regarding the exhaust and aftertreatment systems on International chassis.
International trucks equipped with 2013 engines utilize Selective Catalyst Reduction (SCR). SCR is a chemical reaction in which Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust downstream of the oxidation catalyst where it converts nitrous oxide into ammonia and simpler nitrogen
oxides. For more information on the specific details of how SCR works, please refer to this fact sheet from USEPA: http://www.epa.gov/ttn/catc/dir1/
fscr.pdf.

DEF System Schematic


On most International chassis the DEF Supply Module (or Pump) is integrated into the DEF tank. Navistar, Inc. does not authorize or endorse
relocation of the DEF Supply Module. The following schematic details how the DEF lines route to the after-treatment system.

15_0200

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-41


DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-42
DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
DEF will freeze at approximately 11°F. In order to thaw DEF all tanks are heated with engine coolant. The following schematic shows the routing of
the lines. The coolant lines that run to and from the SCR system must not be tampered with, or used for a source of heat and/or cooling for other
components on the chassis. It is critical that the system is not compromised in any manner.

15_0201
General Guidelines for DEF System
The installation of the DEF tank is critical to the operation of the SCR system. Navistar, Inc. does not recommend relocating the DEF tank but
understands there are applications and body installations that may require it. The guidelines below must be strictly followed by any entity relocating
the DEF tank. Failure to follow the guidelines completely and accurately may result in loss of engine power or engine shutdown.
Since Navistar, Inc. cannot ascertain each possible DEF tank mounting configuration, the body builder and/or person modifying the attachment of
the DEF tank assembly have sole responsibility for correctly mounting the DEF tank assembly, assuring mounting integrity and preventing structural
damage to the DEF tank assembly for a given configuration. Additionally, body builder and/or persons modifying the vehicle must ensure that the
final vehicle configuration conforms to all pertinent federal, state, and local requirements, including but not limited to safety and emissions
requirements.
Navistar, Inc. has multiple DEF tank sizes to meet various applications. The DEF tank volume is sized according to regulatory stipulations that
ensure an adequate supply of urea is available on-board each chassis to which an SCR system is fitted. DEF the tank volume must not be altered
or reconfigured after the truck has been delivered from the factory.
Total DEF capacity must meet or exceed a given percentage of the usable fuel capacity of the truck based on engine size (see table 1 below) The
calculation to determine DEF capacity is:
Minimum DEF Tank Volume = Useable Fuel Capacity (gal) x % in table 1
Example: For medium duty truck with 200 useable gallons of fuel that is not centrally fueled, the equation is
DEF required = 200 x 0.06 = 12 gallons or more of DEF

Truck Class Percent Calculator


Medium (Long Haul) 6.0%
Heavy (Long Haul) 7.4%
Medium (Centrally Fueled Daily) 3.0%
Heavy (Centrally Fueled Daily) 3.7%

Navistar, Inc. approved DEF hoses are required when retro fitting for system to function properly. The use of unapproved hoses for DEF lines will
void warranty and may cause loss of engine power or engine shutdown. The DEF pump (or Supply Module) cannot be relocated from the DEF
tanks.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-43


DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-44
DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
Installation Requirements and Dimensions for DEF System
When relocating any DEF system components, the locations must meet the guidelines below. Failure to comply may cause non-conformance to
EPA standards and may result in engine power loss or shutdown. Body Builders must not modify (including altering, substituting, and relocating) the
DPF/SCR catalysts and the pre DPF/SCR exhaust piping. The downstream SCR catalyst exhaust may be modified, however using smaller diameter
piping or piping with numerous bends is not recommend as the backpressure specification of the system may be exceeded causing engine power
loss or shutdown conditions.
DEF line routing relative heights: In order to ensure proper functionality of the DEF system, the height differences in the guidelines below must be
followed during the line routing and component placement.
With all relocating procedures, general clearances and routing guidelines must be followed.
When relocating the components the maximum pressure DEF line length, from the Supply Module to the Dosing Module, is 3 meters (118”).
Maintain a minimum of 4” clearance to shielded exhaust components and 6” to unshielded exhaust components when routing DEF lines to prevent
possible melting.
If the DEF tank is relocated, the coolant line will need to be modified. If the tank is moved fore or aft along the chassis (i.e. closer or further to the
engine) it will be necessary to remove or add length to the coolant lines and maintain the original routing path. If additional length of coolant line is
required the installation must be located in a straight section of the existing coolant routing lines. The clipping locations for the coolant line must not
be changed. This process will minimize the change in coolant flow by minimizing changes in restrictions. Changes in restriction are added with
excessive line length and additional bends. Work with your local Navistar, Inc. dealer if you are unsure about coolant line modifications.
Modifications of the DEF Injection coolant lines are not allowed. Movement of the DEF coolant tee’s and coolant valve are not allowed.
Measurement Reference Points
For all relocation procedures, the measurement point referenced in the guideline are taken from the following specific points.
Supply Module: The supply module is commonly called the pump. The measurement point on the supply module is the top of the DEF fluid
pressure line.

Measurement Location of DEF Supply Module (Pump) 15_0202

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-45


DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-46
DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
Dosing Module: The dosing module is commonly called an injector. The dosing module is located on the SCR dosing pipe (mixing pipe) which is
between the DPF and SCR catalyst. The measurement point on the dosing module is the fluid pressure line connector.

Measurement Location of DEF Dosing Module (Injector) 15_0203


The following relocation guidelines are dependent on exhaust configuration and DEF tank type and location. The Dosing Module should never need
to be relocated, however if it is removed for any reason, it is critical that the module be reinstalled at the correct orientation. Figure 6 below
illustrates the correct installation orientations. The angle references the vertical plane.

Orientation of Dosing Module 15_0204

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-47


DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-48
DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
Right Hand under Cab DPF and SCR (switchback) DEF Tanks

Medium Duty 15_0205


Horizontal DPF and SCR (inline) DEF Tanks

Medium Duty Inline 15_0208

The height differential between the supply module and dosing module cannot exceed one meter. The supply module is integrated into the DEF tank
assembly, separation of the module from the tank is not allowed. When relocating the components the maximum pressure DEF hose length, from
Supply module to Dosing Module is 3 meters (118”). DEF Pressure hose must include a “trap” in the routing if Dosing Module is below the highest
point of the Supply Module
Routing to the Dosing Module (Injector) to Create Trap
It is important for the function of the dosing module to ensure that the dosing module is not routed downhill (below) of DEF lines or components. If
this is unavoidable (for example on RH under exhaust systems) or Horizontal (Series) Exhaust a routing trap must be installed. A minimum of 12” of
line length must be routed below the dosing module in order to catch any leftover DEF when system is purged.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-49


DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER FUEL TANKS FEBRUARY 2015 — 15-50
DEF SYSTEM AND AFTERTREATMENT INFORMATION FOR SCR - MODELS WITH SCR
CAB
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
All Models
The HVAC system provided with International® DuraStar®, WorkStar®, TranStar® and TerraStar® Series should not be modified. NO additional
components should be added to the factory installed HVAC system as it is delivered from the manufacturer. If additional air conditioning capacity is
needed, a completely independent system should be added to handle the additional load requirements of the Body Builder. There are additional
costs for a second system; it would however, provide for optimal performance from both HVAC systems.
THE FACTORY INSTALLED SYSTEM CANNOT BE MODIFIED IN ANY MANNER. MODIFICATION OF THE HVAC SYSTEM WILL VOID THE INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY
ON THAT SYSTEM.
There are several reasons why HVAC system modifications are not permitted.
• The factory installed HVAC system is optimized for the evaporator, condenser and compressor combination on the vehicle. To introduce an additional
evaporator (or other components) into the system will create an imbalance and unsatisfactory performance.
• The Refrigerant Control and Diagnostics (RCD) software that resides in the vehicle's body computer is designed to monitor the factory installed AC system
only. Adding any additional equipment or components to the original air conditioning system will introduce conditions that the RCD software will interpret as
out-of-specification conditions and cause faults to be logged.
• The factory compressor clutch is cycled by the RCD software residing in the ESC of the vehicle. Modification of this control system to add an auxiliary system
could result in damage to other vehicle components.
• Since the HVAC system has been optimized for the factory components, there is no extra condenser capacity available for an auxiliary evaporator.

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CAB • 16 FEBRUARY 2015 — 16-1


AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CAB • 16 FEBRUARY 2015 — 16-2
CAB DIMENSIONS - ALL MODELS
CAB DIMENSIONS

All Models

GA GA

FA FA

D HA HA

C JA JA
L E
F
M CA CA

G KA
KA KA
STANDARD CAB EXTENDED CAB CREW CAB

A BA

EA

J H

FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW

16_0009
CAB DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED)

All Models

Dimension – Inches
Key Description
Regular Cab Extended Cab Crew Cab
A Shoulder Room 70.6
C Inside Height 56.8
D Steering Wheel Diameter 18.0
E Steering Wheel to Seat Back (Maximum) 18.2
F Bottom of Instrument Panel to Dash 13.9
G Engine Cover Width MaxxForce® DT, MaxxForce® 9, Navistar® N9 and Cummins ISB = 11.7
H Lateral Foot Room - Driver 20.2
J Lateral Foot Room - Passenger 18.8
K Outside Cab Width 82.2
L Steering Wheel to Top of Seat Cushion 5.8
M Top of Front Seat Cushion to Floor 19.6


Driver Seat Track Travel Fixed Seat: 7.9" fore/aft
Air Suspension Seat: 7.4" mm fore/aft
BA Rear Seat Cushion Depth – 18.0
CA Top of Rear Seat Cushion to Floor – 19.0
EA Rear Seat Width – 65.0
FA Rear Seat Spacing – 23.2 40.2
GA Rear Side Window Height – 21.8 21.0
HA Rear Seat Cushion to Top of Window – 33.4 32.6
JA Rear Seat Back Height – 22.4
KA Inside Length 52.4 79.0 96

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CAB • 16 FEBRUARY 2015 — 16-3


CAB DIMENSIONS - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CAB • 16 FEBRUARY 2015 — 16-4
DOOR SWING CLEARANCE - ALL MODELS
DOOR SWING CLEARANCE

All Models
Standard Cab

1933.1
(76.1)

738.5
(29.1)

60°

16_00010
DOOR SWING CLEARANCE (CONTINUED)
All Models
Crew Cab

2003.5
(78.9)
1933.1
(76.1)

1092.4
(43.0) 85°

1852.9
(72.9)

60°

16_0112

DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CAB • 16 FEBRUARY 2015 — 16-5


DOOR SWING CLEARANCE - ALL MODELS
DURASTAR® SERIES BODY BUILDER CAB • 16 FEBRUARY 2015 — 16-6
INSTRUMENT PANEL - ALL MODELS
INSTRUMENT PANEL

All Models

DO NOT DRILL INTO SURFACE OF


INSTRUMENT PANEL. HVAC DUCTS LIE
UNDER THE SURFACE AND WILL BE

Cross-cab tie bar and flat panel mounting

Wing Panel Mounting


16_0011

NOTE:It is not recommended to add any accessory to the instrument panel. If an accessory must be added, it must be attached to the tie bar and framework.

You might also like